Harman Becker Automotive Systems BHDIS Bluetooth Headunit User Manual HMC BH DIS

Harman Becker Automotive Systems Bluetooth Headunit HMC BH DIS

User Manual

We wish you much enjoyment with your
Driver Information System.
Please familiarize yourself with the Driver
Information System and read the operating
guide before using the system. You will
thus be able to make better use of your
system and avoid endangering yourself
and others.
Please understand that actual road status
my be different from the map screens in this
manual due to future updates and changes
of the map content.
The colors on screen elements
represented in this manual my be different
from actual color on the display due to the
illumination from the printing ink.
Hyundai is constantly updating the system
to the latest technological standards and
therefore retains the right to implement
changes in design, equipment and
technology.
3
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Chapters in this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Information about the laser used . . 14
Information about the operating
temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Function restrictions when
driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FCC compliance statement . . . . . . 15
IC compliance statement . . . . . . . . 15
Bluetooth® information . . . . . . . . . . 16
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Functional introduction . . . . . . . . . 17
System features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Headunit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Central control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Function buttons on the
steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Menu system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Composition of the main menu . . . . 24
Calling up main functions . . . . . . . . 25
BACK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operating example for the
FM main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Opening the FM main menu . . . . . . 27
Top status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Bottom status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Main menu, content area and
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Switching the system on . . . . . . . . . 31
Switching the system off . . . . . . . . . 32
Switching audio/video
playback on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Switching to FM or AM mode and
switching radio band . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Video settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
FM and AM mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
HD Radio (TM) information . . . . . . . . . . 40
Licensing information. . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Availibilty information. . . . . . . . . . . . 40
What is HD RadioTM technology? . . 40
Multicasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
HD RadioTM signal delay. . . . . . . . . 40
Automatic switching between digital
and analog broadcasting. . . . . . . . . 41
Text based information . . . . . . . . . . 41
General operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Opening the FM or AM main menu. 42
Tuning to stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tuning to a station via
the station list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tuning to a station via
manual tuning or a search . . . . . . . 45
Tuning to a station via the presets . 46
Tuning to a station via
the Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Storing stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Calling up the station presets . . . . . 49
Showing station details. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Showing details of the currently
tuned HD RadioTM station . . . . . . . . 50
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Opening and closing the
Settings menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
HD off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
RDS off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table of contents
Table of contents
4
XM Satellite Radio mode. . . . . . . . . 55
XM Satellite Radio information/
General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
XM® Satellite Radio information . . . 56
General operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tuning to channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tuning to a channel via
the channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Tuning to a channel via
the Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Tuning to a channel via
the channel list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tuning to a channel via
the category list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tuning to a channel via
channel number input. . . . . . . . . . . 63
Storing channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Storing a channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Opening the XM® Radio
settings menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Closing the XM® Radio
settings menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Set the display in the
upper status line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Set the category filter for
the channel list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Show the Radio ID number . . . . . . . 67
Status screens and messages . . . . . . . 68
Status screen
"Channel Unauthorized". . . . . . . . . . 68
Status screen "No signal" . . . . . . . . 68
Status screen "Loading XM" . . . . . . 69
Status screen
"Selected XM channel is
no longer available" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Status screen "Check Antenna". . . . 69
Status message "OFF AIR" . . . . . . . 70
Disc mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
License notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Automatic video lock-out . . . . . . . . . 72
Supported discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Permissible file systems . . . . . . . . . 73
Multisession CDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Mixed Mode CD/CD-Extra . . . . . . . . 73
MP3 or wma discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Note on copyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Notes on discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Notes on the care of discs . . . . . . . . 76
Notes on playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Loading the disc changer magazine . . . 77
Safety instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Loading the first available
empty magazine compartment . . . . 77
Loading a specific empty
magazine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 78
Loading all empty magazine
compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Ejecting the disc changer magazine . . . 81
Ejecting the magazine
compartment containing
the last disc played . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Ejecting a specific magazine
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Ejecting all magazine
compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Audio disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Switching to disc mode and
starting audio disc playback . . . . . . 84
Disc main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Selecting and playing discs. . . . . . . 87
Pausing or resuming playback . . . . 87
Selecting tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Selecting folders and MP3 or
wma tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fast forwarding/reversing . . . . . . . . 89
Table of contents
5
Repeating tracks or folders . . . . . . 89
Random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Video DVD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Video DVD playback conditions. . . 93
Functional restrictions . . . . . . . . . . 94
Switching to disc mode and
starting video DVD playback . . . . . 94
Disc main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Selecting chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Skipping chapters forward/back. . . 97
Selecting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Switching subtitles on/off . . . . . . . . 97
Switching audio track . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Switching viewing angle . . . . . . . . . 97
Audio settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Video settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Native DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
On-screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Video CD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Functional restrictions . . . . . . . . . 109
Notes on PBC (PlayBack Control) 109
Switching to disc mode and
starting video CD playback . . . . . 109
Disc main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Selecting and playing discs . . . . . 111
Selecting tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Video settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Native video CD menu. . . . . . . . . . 112
On-screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
AUX mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Note on copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Signal sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Supported signal sources . . . . . . . 123
Connecting signal sources . . . . . . 125
General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Switching to AUX mode and
opening the AUX main menu. . . . . 129
iPod playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Starting playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
AUX main menu during iPod®
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
iPod® menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Pausing or resuming playback . . . 134
Selecting a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Fast forwarding/reversing . . . . . . . 136
Repeating tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
USB playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Starting playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
AUX main menu during
USB playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Selecting folders and tracks . . . . . 139
Skipping tracks forward/back . . . . 140
Fast forwarding/reversing . . . . . . . 140
Repeating tracks or folders. . . . . . 140
Random play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
AUX playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Automatic picture switch-off . . . . . 144
Starting playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Opening/closing the
AUX main menu during playback . 145
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Video settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Safety instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Phone main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Opening the Phone main menu . . 152
Table of contents
6
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a
mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Activating Bluetooth® on the
mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Pairing a mobile phone. . . . . . . . . 153
Connecting a mobile phone . . . . . 156
Terminating a connection . . . . . . . 158
Dropped connection . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Calling up the device list. . . . . . . . 160
Renaming a phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Deleting a pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Deleting all pairings . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Initiating a call/accepting or
rejecting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Initiating an outgoing call . . . . . . . 164
Accepting/rejecting an
incoming call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Functions during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Call display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Mute the microphone . . . . . . . . . . 169
Holding and reactivating a call . . . 170
Sending DTMF tones . . . . . . . . . . 171
Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Special functions for two calls . . . 172
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Calling up the phonebook . . . . . . . 175
Creating a new entry . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Editing an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Searching for an entry . . . . . . . . . . 178
Displaying details on an entry . . . . 180
Initiating a call to an entry . . . . . . . 180
Deleting an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Digital map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
GPS reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Route guidance after
vehicle transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Function restrictions when
driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Calling up the map display and
switching to navigation mode. . . . . 187
Position/scroll mode within the
map display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Information on the current
vehicle position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Moving the map/setting the
map scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Audible driving recommendations . 190
Navigation main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Opening the
Navigation main menu . . . . . . . . . 192
Entering destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Entering a destination via
the address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Entering a destination via
the Previous Destinations . . . . . . . 198
Entering a destination via
Intersection input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Entering a POI destination via
POI name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Entering a POI destination via
POI category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Entering a POI destination via
POI phone number . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Entering a POI destination via
a vicinity search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Entering a destination via
the Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Entering an emergency
destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Entering a destination via the map 212
Functions after entering the
destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Options after entering
the destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Conforming the destination . . . . . . 215
Table of contents
7
Adding the destination to an
existing route as a waypoint. . . . . 215
Add the destination to the
Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Initiating a call to a POI . . . . . . . . 216
Adjusting the destination position. 216
Route calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
General information . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Audible driving recommendations 220
Route guidance displays . . . . . . . 220
Functions during route guidance . . . . 222
Suspending route guidance . . . . . 222
Resuming route guidance . . . . . . 222
Displaying the calculated route
again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Changing the route. . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Switching the distance/direction
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Waypoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Functions independent of
route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Freeway information. . . . . . . . . . . 228
Turn List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
POI information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Saving/deleting destinations in the
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Address Book categories. . . . . . . . 232
Entering a destination via the map
and saving it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Entering the destination by
conventional means and saving it . 233
Deleting destinations . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Editing Address Book entries . . . . . . . 239
Selecting an Address Book entry . 239
Editing an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Opening the Settings menu. . . . . . 243
Map display settings . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Switching the map orientation . . . . 244
Switching the map mode . . . . . . . . 245
Estimated time of arrival settings. . 245
Avoid Area settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Displaying navigation information . 249
Reset function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Safety instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
General notes on operation . . . . . . 253
Voice input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Skipping sections of a dialog . . . . 255
Configuring voice control . . . . . . . 256
Help function (teleprompter) . . . . . 256
Operating picklists. . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Tuner mode
(FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio) . . . . 258
Calling up tuner mode. . . . . . . . . . 258
Tuner mode help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Setting the waveband . . . . . . . . . . 258
Setting the frequency
(FM or AM tuner mode only). . . . . 258
Next/previous station
(FM and AM tuner mode only) . . . 259
Next/previous channel
(XM® tuner mode only) . . . . . . . . . 259
Station search
(FM and AM tuner mode only) . . . 259
Selecting channels
(XM® tuner mode only) . . . . . . . . . 259
Operating examples . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Disc mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Calling up disc mode. . . . . . . . . . . 261
Disc mode help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Next/previous disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Table of contents
8
Selecting a disc directly . . . . . . . . 261
Next/previous folder . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Skipping tracks
forwards/backwards . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Selecting a track directly . . . . . . . 262
Operating examples . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Phone mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Calling up phone mode . . . . . . . . 263
Phone help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Dialing a number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Storing numbers in the
phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Calling a phonebook entry . . . . . . 264
Operating examples . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Navigation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Calling up navigation mode . . . . . 268
Navigation mode help. . . . . . . . . . 268
Entering a destination. . . . . . . . . . 268
Saving current position. . . . . . . . . 269
Entering a destination stored in the
Adress Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Starting route guidance . . . . . . . . 269
Stopping route guidance . . . . . . . 270
Redefining a navigation route. . . . 270
Setting a detour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Map display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Switching traffic information on/off 271
Operating examples . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Command overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Group commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Tuner commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Disc commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Phone commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Navigation commands . . . . . . . . . . 278
Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Opening the Info main menu . . . . . . . . 282
Info main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Info functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Climate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Car Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
System Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Rear camera* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
General information and operation . . . 294
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Head unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Antenna type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
9
Chapters in this guide
Introduction
This operating guide has been designed to
assist in using the Driver Information
System. The guide includes the following
chapters:
Functional Introduction
This chapter includes the following:
Functional Description
Menu System
System Components and Controls
FM Main Menu Example
FM and AM mode
Here you will find all information regarding
FM, AM and HD RadioTM1operation.
XM®2 Satellite Radio mode
This chapter describes the XM® Satellite
Radio mode.
Disc mode
In this chapter you will find the descriptions
of how to play the following discs:
Audio CD
MP3 CD
Audio DVD
Video DVD
Video CD
AUX mode
This chapter describes how to connect and
play back audio/video from the following
external signal sources:
iPod®3 (audio playback only)
USB stick (audio playback only)
AUX signal source (audio and/or video
playback)
Phone (Bluetooth® Hands-Free)
This chapter describes the phone functions
that can be accessed if there is a mobile
phone connected with the system.
Navigation
Here you will find, among other things,
detailed information regarding the following
topics:
Destination input
Functions following destination input
Route guidance
Voice control
Here you will find the description of how to
operate the system with voice control.
Info
This chapter describes the following topics:
Displaying various vehicles details
Vehicle settings
System settings
1. HD RadioTM Technology Manufactured Under
License From iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and
Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD Radio
logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
2. XM® and the XM® logos are registered trademarks
of XM Satellite Radio Inc. 3. iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Introduction
10
Introduction
Chapters in this guide
Rear camera*1
Here you will find the description of the
Rear camera*.
Appendix
In this chapter you will find the technical
data of the system and a troubleshooting
section.
Table of contents
The table of contents is intended to help
you find information quickly.
1. The asterisk * identifies optional equipment
11
Introduction
Symbols
General symbols
Safety instructions
In this operating guide you will find various
safety instructions intended to ensure your
personal safety. You should carefully read
and follow all safety instructions.
Icon or text Explanation
* The asterisk * identifies
optional equipment.
! The 'info' icon identifies tips
and additional information.
The filled triangle prompts
you to perform an action.
 Two filled triangles
represent the continuation
symbol.
Page 23 This is how a reference to
another page is shown.
etc.
These bullet points are
used to identify lists.
Icon or text Explanation
!
"
#
etc.
Legends for illustrations
are consecutively
numbered.
Display On-screen displays are
shown in this font.
Command Commands for the voice
control system and voice
output of the voice control
system are shown in italics.
WARNING
This warning identifies where the possible
cause of serious damage to the product may
be, and possible causes of traffic accident
due to user’s carelessness.
CAUTION
This warning identifies a situation where
operation may be misunderstood as an error
or when care needs to be taken when
handling or using the product..
12
Introduction
Operational safety
Safety instructions
WARNING
Operating the Driver-Information-Systems
while driving could cause accidents due to
lack of attention to the road.
Operate the system with the vehicle
parked. Some functions of the system
are disabled when vehicle is in motion.
The system is fully functional only when
the vehicle is parked.
Minimize the time looking at the display.
Parking the vehicle in areas where stopping
or parking is prohibited to operate the
Driver-Information-Systems may be a cause
of an accident.
To operate the system, do not park in areas
where stopping or parking is prohibited.
WARNING
If you use the phone functions when driving,
you may be distracted from the traffic
situation, thus increasing the accident
hazard.
Only use the phone functions when the
vehicle is stationary.
If you use the navigation system, you may
be distracted from the traffic situation and
fail to observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities, thus
increasing the accident hazard.
Only enter a navigation destination
when the vehicle is stationary.
Always observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities.
These always have priority over driving
recommendations made by the system.
WARNING
It is impossible to provide an assurance that
the speed values stored in the digital map
will always match those of the current traffic
regulations in every situation.
Always observe the applicable legal
speed limits and traffic regulations.
The current legal road traffic speed limit
always takes priority over the values
stored in the digital map.
The vehicle speedometer must always
be given priority for display of the
vehicle speed.
13
Introduction
Operational safety
WARNING
Disassembling or altering the Driver
Information System my be a cause for an
accident, fire or electrical shock.
Do not disassemble or alter the system.
Water or other foreign objects entering the
Driver Information System may be a cause
for an accident, fire or electrical shocks.
Be careful of water or other foreign objects
entering the system.
Using the Driver Information System in its
damaged state, such as display or audio not
working, may cause an accident, fire or
electrical shock.
Do not use the system in its damaged state.
WARNING
It can not be guaranteed that all available
emergency services in your vicinity are
stored in the digital map of the navigation
system.
Do not rely excusively on the navigation
system when attempting to locate an
emergency service (hospital, fire
service, etc.).
Use your own discreption and abilities to
secure help in such situations.
Touching the antenna during a
thunderstorm could cause an electrical
shock due to lightning striking the antenna.
Do not touch the antenne during a
thunderstorm.
WARNING
The Driver Information System is a class 1
laser product. Opening the housing or a
defective or damaged housing represents
an injury hazard due to invisible laser
radiation.
Do not open the housing.
For safety reasons, have any
maintenance work performed by
qualified service experts only.
CAUTION
Do not place beverages close to the Driver
Information System. The system may be
damaged if you spill them.
Do not strike or allow anything to impact the
Driver Information System. Damage to the
system could occur.
(continued)
14
Introduction
Operational safety
Information about the laser used
This laser product is classified as a class 1
laser product in accordance with the
national/international standards DIN
EN 60825-1 : 2003-10 and DHHS Rules
21 CFR Subchapter J to the date of
manufacture.
The laser beam in this class 1 laser product
is so weak that it poses no threat in any
situation, or this product is designed that
the laser beam is limited to the inside of the
device. A laser encased in this device can,
however, still be powerful enough to qualify
as a higher class of laser. For this reason
the protective case should not be opened at
any time (loss of warranty).
Technical data for the laser equipment
inside the device:
Output power from laser beam: 0.68 mW
(DVD) / 0.85 mW (CD)
Wave length of laser beam: 665 nm (DVD)
/ 795 nm (CD)
The laser diode is not pulsed during
operation.
Information about the operating
temperature range
!"The guaranteed operating temperature
range is -40° C - +80° C (-40° F - +176° F).
If the temperature is too low or to high, the
Driver Information System may not work.
This is not an indication of damage in the
product, so don’t be alarmed. Please use
the system after waiting for awhile.
Intended purpose
Please keep the following information in
mind when using the Driver Information
System:
The safety instructions in this guide
The road traffic regulations
CAUTION
(continued)
Do not use the Driver Information System in
its damaged state. It may cause a critical
damage to the system.
15
Introduction
Operational safety
Servicing
Tampering with electronic components or
systems and their software may result in
malfunctions. Even systems which have
not been modified may be affected due to
the connectivity of the electronics.
Malfunctioning of the electronics can
seriously endanger the operational safety
of your vehicle.
Always have all work or modifications to
electronic components carried out by an
approved service center with the necessary
expertise and tools for any work required.
Especially for safety-related operations and
operations on safety-related systems,
servicing by an approved service center is
essential.
Function restrictions when driving
the vehicle
Certain functions, such as Navigation
menu selection or Car Settings may be
restricted or unavailable while driving.
As soon as the vehicle falls below a certain
speed, the functions are unrestricted or
available again.
The restriction can be recognized, for
example, from the fact that certain menu
items have no function or that a
corresponding message appears.
Videos such as video DVD or video CD are
viewable only when the gear stick position
is at „P“.
You will find further information in the
corresponding chapters in this manual.
FCC compliance statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Caution
Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer, responsible
for compliance, could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure
information
The radiated output power of the device is
far below the FCC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device
shall be used in such a manner that the
potential for human contact during normal
operation is minimized.
IC compliance statement
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Bluetooth® information
Bluetooth® Qualified Design ID
Number B013386
16
Introduction
Operational safety
Maintenance
Warranty
CAUTION
The Driver Information System contains
high-quality electronic components which
require special care with regard to
maintenance.
The following should be observed:
The display scratches easily. Clean the
display using a dry, clean and soft cloth
with the system off.
Do not exert excessive pressure on the
displays or other surfaces when
cleaning it.
Rough rub, chemical wipe or solvent
(e.g. alcohol, benzene, thinner) may
scratch or distort the display surface.
(continued)
CAUTION
(continued)
The device must not be sprayed with
cleaning agents or liquids. Ingress of
liquids can result in the destruction of
the equipment.
If the system has any problem, please
contact your Hyundai dealer or an
approved service center to resolve the
problem.
CAUTION
Do not open the housing of any system
component.
If you open the housing, the warranty is lost
and after service will not be possible.
17
Functional introduction
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Menu system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating example for the FM main menu . . . . . . . . 27
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
18
Functional introduction
System features
Congratulation to your Driver
Information System!
The Driver Information System is a high-
end multimedia system supporting the
following:
FM, AM and HD RadioTM1 reception
XM®2 Satellite Radio reception
DVD changer supporting up to six discs
of the type audio CD, DVD audio, DVD
video, VCD, MP3 files on CD or DVD,
and WMA files on CD or DVD
External connection supporting USB
with MP3 or WMA files, iPod, and audio
or video AUX connection via a mini
jack.
Especially, the 8-inch display provides high
quality images with great audio output from
Lexicon sound system.
Advantages of the Driver Information
System
Display
8-inch LCD provides three aspect ratio for
all video sources for your taste.
Radio
An additional FM tuner allows all available
stations to be available instantly without
having to search through the entire
frequency band.
The integrated HD RadioTM capable FM/
AM tuner offers digital radio reception.
The integrated XM® Radio tuner offers
digital satellite radio reception.
Antenna
Roof antenna (GPS and XM® Radio
reception) and an integrated glass antenna
(FM/AM reception) offers superb reception
quality.
DVD Changer 6
6 discs in the changer at a time provides a
convenient way of changing switching
between discs without the hassle of
searching, removing, and inserting a
desired disc.
Inserted disc type is identified, and auto
play of its content depending on its type
makes it convenient for the user.
With the PBC (supported by MPEG1
version 2.0 VCD) provides a convenient
way of navigating through the contents
provided by the VCD.
Others
A center control panel that offers commonly
used functions at the tip of your finger gives
great control over the Driver Information
System. The rotate-push-press controller
at the center allows great ease of
navigating through the Driver Information
System menus.
1. HD RadioTM Technology Manufactured Under
License From iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and
Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD Radio
logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
2. XM® and the XM® logos are registered trademarks
of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
19
Functional introduction
System components
The Driver Information System consists of
the following main components:
Headunit, see page 19
Display, see page 19
Central control panel, see page 20
Function buttons on the steering wheel,
see page 22
Headunit
The headunit is located in the vehicle
dashboard.
Display
The display is located in the vehicle
dashboard.
!Front display
Control Page
! Press !:
Switching audio/video
playback on/off
Turn !:
Setting the volume
32
33
" Disc slot
# "
Ejecting the disc changer
magazine 81
$ #
Loading the disc changer
magazine 77
20
Functional introduction
System components
Central control panel
The central control panel is located in the
front in the vehicle center console. It
comprises the controller and the main
function buttons.
!Main function buttons
"Controller
Controller
You can push, turn and press the
controller $, see illustrations below.
Pushing the controller
Push to the left or right %&:
Switching between the areas in a main
menu, see page 29 in this chapter.
Push forwards or backwards '( :
Scrolling through a list page by
page, see page 29 in this chapter.
Selecting a menu item, see page 28
in this chapter.
Push forwards or backwards '(, push
to the left or right %& , push diagonally
)*:
Moving the map, see chapter
"Navigation", section "Moving the map/
setting the map scale" on page 190.
Turning the controller
Turn to the left or right +,:
Selecting a menu item, see page 28 in this
chapter.
21
Functional introduction
System components
Pressing the controller
Press:
Confirming the selection, see page 28 in
this chapter.
Main function buttons
Main function button Page
! -
Switching to FM or AM
mode and switching radio
band 34
" .
Short press:
Going back one menu level 26
Main function button Page
" .
Long press:
Opening the main menu for
the active main function 26
# /
Calling up the map
display and switching to
navigation mode
Calling up a current
audible driving
recommendation
187
191
$ 0
Opening the Navigation
main menu 192
% 1
Opening the Info main
menu
Opening the Phone
main menu
282
152
22
Functional introduction
System components
Function buttons on the steering
wheel
Main function button Page
& 2
Switching to disc mode
Closing the Disc main
menu and returning to
video full-screen display
(Video DVD or video CD
playback only)
Switching to AUX mode
and opening the AUX
main menu
Closing the AUX main
menu and opening the
AUX full-screen display
84
94
109
95
110
129
145
' 3
Opening the XM® Satellite
Radio main menu 57
Function button Page
! 4 and 5
Tuning to a station via
the presets (FM or AM)
Tuning to a station via a
search (FM or AM)
46
45
Function button Page
! 4 and 5
Tuning to a channel via
the channel list (XM®
Satellite Radio)
Selecting discs
Fast forwarding/
reversing:
USB memory stick
iPod®1
Skipping chapters
forward/back (video
DVD)
Skipping tracks forward/
back:
Audio disc
Video CD
iPod®2
USB
1iPod
® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
2iPod
® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
60
87
96
111
140
136
97
87
112
135
140
23
Functional introduction
System components
Function button Page
" 6 and 7
Setting the volume 33
# 8
Switching mode
Switching private mode
on/off (phone)
Switching audio/video
playback on/off
170
32
$ 9
Activating/deactivating the
voice control system 254
% :
Opening the Phone
main menu
Using redial
Accepting/rejecting an
incoming call
Ending a call
Swapping between two
calls
152
168
168
171
173
24
Functional introduction
Menu system
The Driver Information System is easy to
use thanks to its menu system.
There is a main menu for each of the
following main functions:
FM (FM band)
AM (AM band)
XM® (Satellite Radio)
Disc (audio CD, MP3 CD, audio/video
DVD and video CD)
AUX (iPod, USB memory stick and AUX
signal source)
Phone (Bluetooth® handsfree)
Info (vehicle and system settings as
well as various vehicle status displays)
Navigation
Composition of the main menu
The main menu for a main function
comprises at most the following three user-
control areas:
Main menu
Content area
Options menu
It also contains the following two non-user-
control areas:
Top status line
Bottom status line
The illustration below shows the main
menu for the FM main function.
!Main menu
"Top status line
#Content area
$Options menu
%Highlighted menu item in the Options
menu
&Bottom status line
WARNING
Operating the Driver-Information-Systems
while driving could cause accidents due to
lack of attention to the road.
Operate the system with the vehicle
parked. Some functions of the system
are disabled when vehicle is in motion.
The system is fully functional only when
the vehicle is parked.
Minimize the time looking at the display.
25
Functional introduction
Menu system
Top and bottom status lines
The top and bottom status lines " and &
contain no user controls. The status lines
are provided for information purposes only
and can show you, for example, the
following:
information on the currently active main
function, see section "Top status line"
on page 27,
information on the currently active
entertainment source (e.g. FM), see
section "Top status line" on page 27,
Bluetooth connection status of the
phone, see chapter "Phone", section
"Connecting a mobile phone" on
page 156.
Main menu
The main menu ! shows the subfunctions
available for the active main function as
individual menu items.
!"See page 28 for a description of how to
select a menu item and confirm the
selection.
Content area
The content area # shows either the
content of the menu item selected in the
main menu ! or a further submenu where
you can again select a menu item.
!"See page 28 for a description of how to
select a menu item and confirm the
selection.
Options menu
For certain displays in the content area #
you can open the Options menu $. It
contains additional information or setting
options.
Calling up main functions
Option 1
!"Pressing one of the following main function
buttons activates the corresponding mode,
provided it was not previously active. If it
was already active, then it remains active.
FM mode: Press the main function
button -, see page 42.
AM mode: Press the main function
button -, see page 42.
XM® Satellite Radio mode: Press the
main function button 3, see page
page 57.
Disc mode: Press the main function
button 2, see page 84, 94 or 109.
AUX mode: Press the main function
button 2, see page 129.
Phone mode: Press the main function
button 1, see page 152.
Info mode: Press the main function
button 1, see page 282.
Navigation mode: Press the main
function button /, see page 187.
or
Press the main function button 0,
see page 192.
26
Functional introduction
Menu system
Option 2
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the desired main
function is displayed.
!"You cannot switch to the main functions
Phone, Info and Navigation on the steering
wheel.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
main function, switching to FM/AM, XM®
Satellite Radio, Disc or AUX main function
on the steering wheel does not switch the
display, only the audio source will be
switched accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the corresponding main function
button on the control panel.
BACK function
To go back one menu level: Briefly
press the . button.
To open the main menu for the active
main function: Press and hold
the . button.
!"There are certain menus or displays that you
can only exit or close by briefly pressing
the . button.
27
Functional introduction
Operating example for the FM main menu
Opening the FM main menu
Press the - button.
Either the FM or the AM main menu
appears when you press the -
button.
If the AM main menu appears:
Press the - button again.
The FM main menu appears.
or
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the FM main
menu appears.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to FM mode on the steering
wheel does not switch the display, only the
audio source will be switched accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the - button on the control
panel.
Top status line
The top status line shows various
information.
!Currently active main function
"Currently active entertainment source
#Preset of the currently selected station
in the presets
$Frequency of the currently selected
station
%Indicator for stereo reception
Bottom status line
The bottom status line shows the controller
icons amon other things.
!Controller icons
The icons , , and represent the
directions of movement of the
controller $.
The icon ! represents turning the
controller $.
Each individual icon can be shown in white
or grey.
White icon:
Pushing or turning as appropriate initiates
an operation.
Grey icon:
Pushing or turning as appropriate does not
initiate an operation.
28
Functional introduction
Operating example for the FM main menu
Main menu, content area and
Options menu
!Main menu with the various menu items
(blue frame around the menu= menu is
active)
"Selected menu item
#Content area (no blue frame around the
content area= content area is inactive)
Selecting a menu item
Turn +, the controller $ until the
desired menu item is highlighted.
or
Push '( the controller $ until the
desired menu item is highlighted.
!"If you select a menu item in the main menu
!, then the display in the content area #
can automatically show further information
or menus for the selected menu item. In the
previous illustration, the menu item Presets
is selected and the content area # then
shows the presets in the form of a list.
Confirming the selection
Press the controller $.
The content area is now active and
supplied with a blue frame.
!"In the following descriptions, selection of a
menu item and confirmation of the selection
is combined into one prompt for action and
referred to as "selecting".
The illustration below shows, in the content
area ", the presets in the form of a list.
You can select and confirm a menu item in
the list as previously described, which, in
this example, will result in the system
tuning to the appropriation station.
!Main menu
"Content area
#Selected menu item in the content area
$Icon indicating the Options menu is
available
%Icon for the currently selected station
!"The Options menu is only available if the
icon appears to the right of a menu item.
In the illustration above, the Options menu
is available for all menu items.
29
Functional introduction
Operating example for the FM main menu
Opening the Options menu
With the content area active, push &
the controller $ once.
The Options menu for the selected
menu item appears. In the Options
menu you can select and confirm
further menu items.
!Options menu
Closing the Options menu
Push % the controller $ once.
or
Briefly press the . button.
The Options menu is now closed and
the content area becomes active again.
Switching between the areas in a main
menu
Push %& the controller $ repeatedly
until the desired area is active.
!"You can tell an active area by the blue frame
around the area.
Lists
The menus in all three user-control areas in
a main menu (main menu, content area and
Options menu) can be displayed in the form
of lists.
In addition to selecting and confirming as
previously described, when using lists the
following options are also available:
Scrolling through a list page by page,
see page 29
Displaying an abbreviated list entry in
full, see page 30
Scrolling through a list page by page
!List
"Scrolling behavior cursor
If a list contains more than one page, the
scrolling behavior cursor " will be
displayed.
To scroll down: Push ( the
controller $ repeatedly until the
desired page is displayed.
To scroll up: Push ' the controller $
repeatedly until the desired page is
displayed.
30
Functional introduction
Operating example for the FM main menu
!"When you scroll through the list page by
page or select an entry, the scrolling
behavior cursor " moves accordingly. By
doing so it indicates your current position in
the list.
Displaying an abbreviated list entry in
full
List entries must be abbreviated for display
in the content area. Abbreviated entries are
indicated by the three dots at the end of the
entry.
!Abbreviated entry
To call up the complete text: Push &
the controller $ repeatedly until the
Options menu is displayed.
!Options menu
Turn +, the controller $ until the
menu item Details is highlighted.
or
Push ' ( the controller $ until the
menu item Details is highlighted.
Press the controller $.
The complete text is displayed.
!Complete text
To close the complete text: Press the
controller $ again.
31
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Switching the system on
!"After switching the system on, the boot
process starts. During the boot process you
can not operate the system. It takes some
time until all system functions are ready,
especially for the voice control system.
Vehicles with ignition
Insert the ignition key into the ignition
and turn to the ACC or IGN position.
The system will switch on and a safety
instruction will be displayed after a short
time.
To confirm the safety instruction:
Press the controller $.
Vehicles without ignition
Press the vehicle’s Start button once.
If you have not applied the brakes, ACC
and the system is switched on.
If you have applied the brakes, IGN and
the system is switched on and the
vehicle engine starts.
In both cases, the safety instruction
mentioned above will be displayed.
To confirm the safety instruction:
Press the controller $.
Battery warning message
Please use the system with the vehicle’s
engine running. When using the system
with the engine not running, after 10
minutes of operation you will be warned
with the following message to turn the
ignition on to start the engine.
The message disappears automatically
after a short time and will be redisplayed for
5 seconds every 1 minute continuously.
Prolonged usage of the system with the
engine not running may cause complete
discharge of the battery.
WARNING
Hearing damage due to high volume
level!
When switching the Driver Information
System on, a sudden burst of high volume
may be a cause of hearing damage.
When the system switches on, be careful of
the volume level. Set the volume to an
acceptable level before switching the
system off.
32
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Switching the system off
Vehicles with ignition
To switch the system off: Turn the
ignition key to the OFF position.
The system will switch off.
Vehicles without ignition
Press the vehicle’s Start button once.
The system will switch off.
Switching off during a phone call
If you switch the system off during a phone
call using the hands-free unit of the system,
the call will be transfered automatically
back to the mobile phone (private mode).
Switching audio/video playback on/
off
!"When the system is switched on, you can
switch audio/video playback off and on
independently. Whether audio/video
playback is switched on or off, you can
switch the system on and off without
affecting it.
The following functions are still available
when audio/video playback is switched off:
Phone (Bluetooth® handsfree)
Navigation
Info
Switching off
On the headunit: Press the rotary
knob !.
or
On the steering wheel: Press and hold
the 8 button.
In both cases, audio/video playback
switches off and the message AV OFF
is shown in the top status line.
Additionally, the system switches to the
navigation map display, if one of the
following modes was selected and
shown in the display before playback
was switched off:
FM mode
AM mode
XM® Satellite Radio mode
Disc mode
AUX mode
For all other modes, the display
remains unchanged.
33
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Switching on
Option 1
On the headunit: Press the rotary
knob !.
or
On the steering wheel: Briefly press
the 8 button.
In all of the above cases, the audio/
video that was playing before playback
was switched off is resumed.
Option 2
Press one of the main function buttons
-, 2or 3.
The system will switch to the mode
corresponding to the button pressed.
or
Disc mode: Loading a magazine
compartment, see page 77, page 78
and page 79.
or
AUX mode: Connecting an iPod or
USB memory stick, see page 125.
In both cases, the system will switch to
the corresponding mode.
Setting the volume
There is one common volume setting for
the FM, AM, Disc, AUX and XM® Satellite
Radio signal sources.
Separate volume settings are possible
for the phone, for audible driving
recommendations and for voice control.
The respective volume can be set during
a phone call, during an audible driving
recommendation and during voice output.
!"The volume for audible driving
recommendations can also be set in the
navigation settings, see the chapter
"Navigation", section "Audible driving
recommendations" on page 190.
The system automatically saves the
respective setting upon setting.
On the headunit
Turn the rotary knob !.
On the steering wheel
Briefly press the 7 or 6 button one
or more times.
The volume will change in small
increments.
or
WARNING
Driving with the volume set to such a level
that the outside sound is not audible, may
be a cause of an accident.
Set the volume to such a level, that the
outside sound is audible.
34
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Press and hold the 7 or 6 button.
The volume will change in large
increments.
Switching to FM or AM mode and
switching radio band
Press the - button.
If FM or AM mode was active before,
the system will switch band.
If another mode was active before, the
system will switch to FM or AM mode
and tune to the FM or AM band.
or
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the FM or AM
main menu appears.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to FM or AM mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the - button on the control
panel.
Audio settings
The audio settings include the following
functions:
Setting the balance/fader, see page 35
Setting the treble/mid/bass, see
page 36
Setting the equalizer, see page 36
Switching surround on/off, see page 37
Performing an audio reset, see page 38
Opening the Audio Settings menu
!"The Audio Settings menu is opened in
different ways, depending on the currently
active signal source.
Active signal source is FM, AM, XM®
Satellite Radio, audio CD/DVD, MP3 CD
or AUX (audio)
The illustration shows the FM main menu
with the main menu activated
!Main menu
"Audio Settings menu
#Content area
$Settings menu item
35
Functional introduction
Basic functions
In the main menu !, select the menu
item Settings $.
The Audio Settings menu " is
displayed in the content area #.
Active signal source is Video CD, video
DVD or AUX (video)
Press and hold the . button until the
appropriate main menu is displayed.
The illustration shows the video DVD main
menu with the main menu activated
!Main menu
"Selection menu
#Content area
$Settings menu item
In the main menu !, select the menu
item Settings $.
The audio/video selection menu is
displayed in the content area #.
In the audio/video selection menu,
select the menu item Audio.
The Audio Settings menu is displayed
in the content area #.
Closing the Audio Settings menu
Briefly press the . button.
Setting the balance/fader
!"The balance/fader setting applies to all
signal sources.
To open the Balance/Fader menu: In
the Audio Settings menu, select the
menu item Balance/Fader.
The Balance/Fader menu is displayed
in the content area.
!Scale for the fader setting
"Fader indicator
#Balance indicator
$Scale for the balance setting
The position of the two indicators " and
# on the scale show the current settings.
The color of the two indicators shows
whether the balance function or the fader
function is active. In the illustration above,
the fader function is active.
Activating the balance or fader
function: If necessary, press the
controller $.
The previously inactive function is now
active.
36
Functional introduction
Basic functions
To set balance or fader: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired setting is
reached.
The system saves the setting
automatically.
To close the Balance/Fader menu:
Push % the controller $ once.
or
Briefly press the . button.
Setting the treble/mid/bass
!"The system automatically saves the treble/
mid/bass settings separately for all audio
and video signal sources.
To open the Treble/Mid/Bass menu:
In the Audio Settings menu, select the
menu item Treble/Mid/Bass.
The Treble/Mid/Bass menu is displayed
in the content area.
!Scale for the treble setting
"Scale for the mid setting
#Scale for the bass setting
$Treble indicator
%Mid indicator
&Bass indicator
The position of the three indicators $, %
and & on the scales !, " and # show
the respective current settings.
The color of the indicators shows which of
the scales is active. In the illustration
above, the scale for the treble setting is
active.
!"You can tell an active scale by the white
frame around the scale.
Activating a scale: Push '( the
controller $ repeatedly until the
desired scale is active.
or
Press the controller $ until the desired
scale is active.
To set a value: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired setting is
reached.
The indicator moves accordingly on the
scale, showing you the setting.
To close the Treble/Mid/Bass menu:
Push % the controller $ once.
or
Briefly press the . button.
Setting the equalizer
!"The equalizer provides you with five
predefined presets for calling up. You
can activate different presets for all audio
and video signal sources; the system
automatically saves the setting.
37
Functional introduction
Basic functions
To open the Equalizer menu: In the
Audio Settings menu, select the menu
item EQ Presets.
The Equalizer menu is displayed in the
content area.
!Highlighted menu item
"Currently active preset (icon ")
#Currently inactive presets (icon !)
To activate a preset: Select the
desired preset in the content area.
The Equalizer menu is automatically
closed after a short time.
!"If you adjust the sound settings, see the
section "Setting the treble/mid/bass" on
page 36, then the system will automatically
activate the Custom preset and store the
changes made in this preset.
Switching surround on/off
There is a common surround setting for the
following signal sources:
FM
AM
XM® Satellite Radio
iPod, USB memory stick and AUX
signal source
Audio CD without DTS sound
Video CD
There is also a common surround setting
for the following signal sources:
Audio DVD
Video DVD
Audio CD with DTS sound
!"The two settings are independent of each
other. The system saves the settings
automatically.
To switch the surround function on/
off: In the Audio Settings menu, select
the menu item Surround.
!Status display
"Menu item Surround
38
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display will change accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
Performing an audio reset
You can use the audio reset function to
reset the following features to the factory
settings:
Balance/Fader
Treble/Mid/Bass
EQ Presets
Surround
In the Audio Settings menu, select the
menu item Reset Audio Settings.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to reset the audio settings.
Select Yes or No.
The system will or will not reset the
audio settings, depending on the
answer you select.
Video settings
Please see chapter "Disc mode", section
"Video DVD playback", subsection "Video
settings" on page 97 for a description of the
video settings.
39
FM and AM mode
HD Radio (TM) information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tuning to stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Storing stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Showing station details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
40
FM and AM mode
HD Radio (TM) information
Licensing information
HD RadioTM Technology Manufactured
Under License From iBiquity Digital
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD
RadioTM and the HD Radio logo are
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
Availibilty information
HD RadioTM reception is available in the
United States, including Alaska and
Hawaii.
What is HD RadioTM technology?
The Driver Information System is able to
receive standard analog FM/AM radio
broadcasting as well as digital HD RadioTM
FM/AM broadcasting.
HD RadioTM technology provides digital
and analog reception using existing FM
and AM broadcasting frequencies.
Currently, radio stations broadcasting an
HD RadioTM signal are operating in a hybrid
mode of both, analog and digital, in order to
reach both receivers. In both modes,
analog and digital, the broadcasted
program content is the same (except of
multicasting, see below).
Eventually, as analog receivers are
replaced by digital ones, radio stations may
be able to turn off their analog broadcasting
and use only the digital one.
Multicasting
HD RadioTM FM stations are able to
broadcast multiple digital program streams
(channels) over a single FM frequency. For
example, a HD RadioTM FM station can run
a main channel of music and a sub channel
of news (or even two different music
channels) at one frequency.
But only the program content of the main
channel is also broadcasted analog.
HD RadioTM signal delay
To overcome the delay that digital systems
inherently produce, HD RadioTM
technology first uses the audio signal of the
analog broadcasting when you tune to an
AM station or to the main channel of a FM
station. After that, the system will blend
from analog to digital signal.
Normally, this blending is very smooth. If
you experience a skip in program content of
several seconds, the radio station has not
implemented HD RadioTM broadcasting
correctly. This is not a problem with your
Driver Information System.
Due to the fact that sub channels are only
broadcasted digital, blending from analog
to digital signal is not possible if you tune to
a sub channel. In this case playback of the
sub channel starts after several seconds,
this is a normal function.
41
FM and AM mode
HD Radio (TM) information
Automatic switching between
digital and analog broadcasting
If the reception of the digital signal is lost,
the system switches automatically to the
analog signal. As soon as the digital signal
is available again it will switch back.
Due to the fact that sub channels are only
broadcasted digital, first the system mutes
playback if you have tuned to a sub channel
and the digital signal is lost.
Second, after 25 seconds with the digital
signal lost, the system will automatically
tune to the analog signal of the main
channel.
Text based information
HD RadioTM stations are able to broadcast
text based informations, e.g. station name,
song title and artist name. The Driver
Information System is able to display these
informations.
42
FM and AM mode
General operation
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Opening the FM or AM main menu
Opening the FM or AM main menu
Press the - button.
or
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the FM or AM
main menu appears.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to FM or AM mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the - button on the control
panel.
FM main menu and upper status line
while receiving an FM signal
!Currently active main function
"Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
#Currently active entertainment source
$Preset of the currently tuned station in
the presets
%Frequency or name of the currently
tuned station (depends on the setting,
see section "RDS off" on page 53)
&Indicator for stereo reception
'Main menu
FM main menu and upper/lower status
line while receiving a digital FM HD
RadioTM signal
!Currently active main function
"Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
#Currently active entertainment source
$Preset of the currently tunded station in
the presets
%If transmitted name of the currently
tuned station, else frequency
&Indicator for HD RadioTM reception
'If transmitted song title currently
playing, else no display
(Main menu
43
FM and AM mode
General operation
AM main menu and upper status line
while receiving an analog AM signal
!Currently active main function
"Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
#Currently active entertainment source
$Preset of the currently tuned station in
the presets
%Frequency of the currently tuned station
&Main menu
AM main menu and upper/lower status
line while receiving a digital AM HD
RadioTM signal
!Currently active main function
"Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
#Currently active entertainment source
$Preset of the currently tuned station in
the presets
%If transmitted name of the currently
tuned station, else frequency
&Indicator for HD RadioTM reception
'If transmitted song title currently
playing, else no display
(Main menu
Switching bands
Press the - button.
The system will switch band.
44
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Overview
The following options are available:
Tuning to a station via the station list,
see page 44
Tuning to a station via manual tuning or
a search, see page 45
Tuning to a station via the presets, see
page 46
Tuning to a station via the Scan
function, see page 47
Tuning to a station via the station
list
!"This function is only available in the FM
band. The station list contains all the
currently receivable FM stations. It is sorted
by frequency number and is automatically
refreshed and updated by the system.
To request the station list: Open the
FM or AM main menu, see section
"Opening the FM or AM main menu" on
page 42.
In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Local Stations.
The station list appears.
!Icon for the currently tuned station
To tune to a station: Select the
desired station in the station list.
The system tunes to the corresponding
station.
If the selected station is a multicasting
HD RadioTM
FM station, the system tunes to the
main channel of the corresponding
station. The station list will show the
main and the sub channel.
!Main channel
"Sub channel
To tune to a sub or a main channel:
Select the corresponding channel in the
station list.
The system tunes to the corresponding
channel.
45
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
Tuning to a station via manual
tuning or a search
Using the steering wheel
Press and hold the 4 or 5 button.
The search proceeds downwards or
upwards and stops at the next
receivable station.
Using the central control panel
To open the Tune & Seek menu:
Open the FM or AM main menu, see
section "Opening the FM or AM main
menu" on page 42.
In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Tune & Seek.
The Tune & Seek menu appears.
!Frequency indicator (shows the
currently tuned frequency)
"Indicator.
The indicator " shows one the following:
HD 1 or HD 2 (in case the tuned station
is a multicasting HD RadioTM station,
see section "Tuning to a sub channel"
below)
HD (in case the tuned station is a non-
multicasting HD RadioTM station)
MHz or kHz (in case the tuned station is
an analog radio station)
!"If HD off is set in the settings (see section
"Settings" on page 52), you have only
access to analog radio stations. In this case,
the indicator " shows always MHz or kHz.
Manual tuning: Turn +, the
controller $.
The frequency increases or decreases,
depending on the direction of rotation.
Search: Push '( the controller $.
The seek proceeds upwards or
downwards and stops at the next
receivable station.
Tuning to a sub channel
Tuning to a HD RadioTM sub channel is only
possible if the tuned station is a
multicasting HD RadioTM station.
You can tell this by indicator ", see picture
above.
To tune to another channel: Press the
controller $.
The indicator " is highlighted.
46
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
!Frequency indicator (not highlighted)
"Indicator (highlighted)
Turn +, the controller $.
The system tunes to the next or the
previous channel.
To highlight the frequency indicator
again: Press the controller $.
!Frequency indicator (highlighted)
"Indicator (not highlighted)
Now you can operate the manual tuning
or the search again.
Branching from the Tune & Seek menu
directly to the presets
!"This function is useful if you have tuned to a
station in the Tune & Seek menu and wish
to store it as a preset.
Press and hold the controller $ until
the presets appear.
Tuning to a station via the presets
!"If you tune via the presets to a non-
receivable sub channel of a FM HD RadioTM
station, the system mutes playback. In this
case, tune to another receivable station.
Using the central control panel
To call up a preset: Open the FM or
AM main menu, see section "Opening
the FM or AM main menu" on page 42.
In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Presets.
The presets appear in the form of a list.
47
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
!Preset number of the currently tuned
station
"Icon for the currently tuned station
To tune to a station: Select the
desired station in the list.
Using the steering wheel
Briefly press the 4 or 5 button.
The system will tune to the previous or
next station stored in the presets.
Tuning to a station via the Scan
function
!"The Scan function searches through the
selected band, stops at a receivable station,
plays the station for five seconds and goes
to the next receivable station. It will not
search for FM HD RadioTM sub channels.
To request the presets: Open the FM
or AM main menu, see section
"Opening the FM or AM main menu" on
page 42.
In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Presets.
The preset appear.
!Presets
To open the Options menu: In the
presets push the controller $ once &.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
"Menu item Scan
To start the Scan function: In the
Options menu select the menu item
Scan.
The Scan function starts, a
corresponding Scan message is
displayed.
48
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
!"The Scan function will not search for FM HD
RadioTM sub channels. The Scan function
will stop automatically, if the frequency from
where it has been started is reached again.
You can also stop the Scan function
manually.
To stop the Scan function manually:
Press the controller $.
The system will stop the Scan function.
or
Briefly press the 4 or 5 button on
the steering wheel.
The system will stop the Scan function.
Button 4 was pressed: The system
will tune to the station stored in the
preset 16.
Button 5 was pressed: The system
will tune to the station stored in the
preset 1.
or
Press and hold the 4 or 5 button on
the steering wheel until the Scan
message disappears.
The system will stop the Scan function
and activate the search function.
Button 4 was pressed: The seek
proceeds downwards and stops at the
next receivable station.
Button 5 was pressed: The seek
proceeds upwards and stops at the next
receivable station.
49
FM and AM mode
Storing stations
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
!"There are 16 presets available for each
band.
Calling up the station presets
Open the FM or AM main menu, see
section "Opening the FM or AM main
menu" on page 42.
In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Presets.
The presets appear in the form of a list.
The currently tuned station is displayed
in the top status line.
!Frequency or name of the currently
tuned station (depends on the setting,
see section "RDS off" on page 53)
"Preset number 6
Selecting a preset (e.g. preset number 6)
Turn +, the controller $ until the
preset number 6 is highlighted.
Storing the currently tuned station in the
preset number 6
Option 1: Press and hold the
controller $ until the station is stored.
Option 2: Push & the controller $
once.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Store Station.
The station is stored.
50
FM and AM mode
Showing station details
Showing details of the currently
tuned HD RadioTM station
!"The system is able to show the following
details of the currently tuned HD RadioTM
station:
Name and the frequency of the currently
tuned HD RadioTM station,
the title name and the artist name of the
title currently playing.
Opening the Options menu
In case of a multicasting FM HD RadioTM
station
In the station list or in the presets,
highlight the currently tuned channel.
!Highlighted channel
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears, see
section "Options menu" below.
In case of a non-multicasting FM HD
RadioTM station or an AM HD RadioTM
station
In the station list or in the presets,
highlight the currently tuned channel.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears, see
section "Options menu" below.
Options menu
!Menu item Details
"Options menu
To open the details screen: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Details.
You will see the details screen.
!"The menu item Details has no function if the
highlighted station is not the currently tuned
station or if it is not a HD RadioTM station.
51
FM and AM mode
Showing station details
To close the details screen: Press the
controller $.
52
FM and AM mode
Settings
Overview
The settings include the following
functions:
HD off, see page 52
RDS off, see page 53
Opening and closing the Settings
menu
Opening the Settings menu
Open the FM or AM main menu, see
section "Opening the FM or AM main
menu" on page 42.
In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
!Menu item Settings
"Settings menu
Closing the Settings menu
Briefly press the . button.
HD off
!"With this function switched on, you have
access to analog FM/AM stations only.
Open the Settings menu, see section
"Opening and closing the Settings
menu" on page 52.
!Settings menu
"Menu item HD off
#Status display
Select the menu item HD off.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The status display # changes
accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
53
FM and AM mode
Settings
RDS off
!"With this function switched on, the upper
status line always shows the frequency of
the currently tuned analog FM radio station.
With this function switched off, the upper
status line shows the station name if
transmitted by the analog FM radio station,
else the frequency will be displayed.
!Station name or frequency
Open the Settings menu, see section
"Opening and closing the Settings
menu" on page 52.
!Settings menu
"Menu item RDS off
#Status display
Select the menu item RDS off.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The status display # changes
accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
54
FM and AM mode
Settings
55
XM Satellite Radio mode
XM Satellite Radio information/General operation . 56
Tuning to channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Storing channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Status screens and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
56
XM Satellite Radio mode
XM Satellite Radio information/General operation
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
XM® Satellite Radio information
Licensing information
XM® and the XM® logos are registered
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Availibility information
XM® Satellite Radio is available in the
United States (except Alaska and Hawaii)
and Canada.
What is XM® Satellite Radio?
XM® Satellite radio offers the reception of a
multitude of stations - all in digital quality.
A wide range of programs is available, e.g.
music, sports, news, and entertainment, all
largely without the interruption of
advertisements.
Using of XM® Satellite Radio
Before using the XM® Satellite Radio
service, you must sign up with the provider
XM® Satellite Radio. The provider needs
the Radio ID number which can be
displayed in the Settings menu, see section
"Settings" on page 65.
!"If you have tuned to channel 0, the Radio ID
number will also be displayed in the lower
statusline, see section "Opening the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu" on page 57.
Without sign up, only the free-to-air
channels of XM® Satellite Radio are
available. Channel 1 (preview/promotional
channel) is one example. But there may be
other free-to-air channels.
The XM® Satellite Radio program is
available for a modest monthly fee.
XM® Satellite Radio may request payment
of an additional fee to enable certain
channels.
For further information about XM® Satellite
Radio please visit the following website:
www.xmradio.com
57
XM Satellite Radio mode
XM Satellite Radio information/General operation
General operation
Opening the XM® Satellite Radio main
menu
Press the 3 button.
or
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the XM® main
menu appears.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to XM® Satellite Radio
mode on the steering wheel does not switch
the display, only the audio source will be
switched accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the 3 button on the control
panel.
The following illustration shows the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu with the main
menu activated.
!Currently active main function
"Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
#Currently active entertainment source
$Preset of the currently tuned channel in
the presets
%Channel name or number of the
currently tuned channel (depends on
the setting, see section "Settings" on
page 65)
&Indicator for XM® Satellite Radio mode
'If transmitted song title currently
playing, else no display
!"If you have tuned to channel 0, the display
' shows the Radio ID number.
(Main menu
58
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Overview
The following options are available:
Tuning to a channel via the channel
presets, see page 58
Tuning to a channel via the Scan
function, see page 59
Tuning to a channel via the channel list,
see page 60
Tuning to a channel via the category
list, see page 61
Tuning to a channel via channel
number input, see page 63
Tuning to a channel via the channel
presets
Using the central control panel
To request the presets: Open the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu, see section
"Opening the XM® Satellite Radio main
menu" on page 57.
In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Presets.
The presets appear.
!Preset number of the currently tuned
channel
"Icon for the currently tuned channel
To tune to a channel: Select the
desired channel in the presets.
!"A status screen appears if the selected
channel is no longer available, see section
"Status screen "Selected XM channel is no
longer available"" on page 69.
To show details of the currently
tuned channel: Highlight the currently
tuned channel in the presets.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
"Menu item Details
59
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
You will see the details screen.
To close the details screen: Press the
controller $.
Using the steering wheel
Briefly press the 4 or 5 button.
The system will tune to the previous or
next channel stored in the presets.
Tuning to a channel via the Scan
function
!"The Scan function searches through the
subscribed channels, stops at a receivable
channel, plays the channel for five seconds
and goes to the next channel.
The Channel 0 is not covered by the Scan
function.
In the settings, see section "Settings" on
page 65, you can set a category filter for the
Scan function.
To request the presets: Open the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu, see section
"Opening the XM® Satellite Radio main
menu" on page 57.
In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Presets.
The presets appear.
!Presets
To open the Options menu: In the
presets push the controller $ once &.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
"Menu item Scan
60
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
To start the Scan function: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Scan.
The Scan function starts, a
corresponding message is displayed.
!"The Scan function will stop automatically, if
the channel from where it has been started
is reached again. You can also stop the
Scan function manually.
To stop the Scan function manually:
Press the controller $.
The system will stop the Scan function.
or
Briefly press the 4 or 5 button on
the steering wheel.
The system will stop the Scan function.
Button 4 was pressed: The system
will tune to the channel stored in the
preset 16.
Button 5 was pressed: The system
will tune to the channel stored in the
preset 1.
or
Press and hold the 4 or 5 button on
the steering wheel until the Scan
message disappears.
The system will stop the Scan function.
Button 4 was pressed: The system
will tune to the previous channel in the
channel list.
Button 5 was pressed: The system
will tune to the next channel in the
channel list.
Tuning to a channel via the channel
list
!"The channel list contains only channels you
have subscribed. In the settings, see
section "Settings" on page 65, you can set a
category filter for the list.
Using the steering wheel
Press and hold the 4 or 5 button.
The system tunes to the previous or
next channel in the channel list.
Using the central control panel
To request the channel list: Open the
XM® Satellite Radio main menu, see
section "Opening the XM® Satellite
Radio main menu" on page 57.
In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Channel List.
The channel list appears.
61
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
!Icon for the currently tuned channel
"Channel number
#Channel name
To tune to a channel: Select the
desired channel in the channel list.
To show details of the currently
tuned channel: Highlight the currently
tuned channel in the channel list.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, press the
controller $.
You will see the details screen.
To close the details screen: Press the
controller $.
Tuning to a channel via the category
list
To request the category list: Open
the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
see section "Opening the XM® Satellite
Radio main menu" on page 57.
In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Category List.
The category list appears.
!Category list
62
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
Select the desired category.
The channel list according to the
selected category appears.
!Item for going back to the category list
"Currently tuned channel
#Channel name
$Channel number
!"If no channel is available for the selected
category, the list will be empty except for the
item !.
Select the desired channel.
To go back to the category list:
Select the item ! in the channel list or
press the . button.
To show details of the currently
tuned channel: Highlight the currently
tuned channel in the channel list.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, press the
controller $.
You will see the details screen.
To close the details screen: Press the
controller $.
63
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
Tuning to a channel via channel
number input
!"The channel number input is restricted to
channels you have subscribed
To request the channel number input
menu: Open the XM® Satellite Radio
main menu, see section "Opening the
XM® Satellite Radio main menu" on
page 57.
In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Direct Tune.
The channel number input menu
appears. The number of the currently
tuned channel is displayed and the first
digit of the channel number is
highlighted.
!First digit of the channel number
(highlighted)
"Second digit of the channel number
#Third digit of the channel number
$Channel related information
!"You can enter the channel number digit by
digit. The input of a digit will be not available
if the digit combination will result in a chanel
number which is not subscribed or out of
range.
To enter the first digit: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired first digit
is displayed.
After that, press the controller $.
The second digit is highlighted.
To enter the second digit: Turn +,
the controller $ until the desired
second digit is displayed.
After that, press the controller $.
The third digit is highlighted.
To enter the third digit: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired third digit
is displayed.
After that, press the controller $.
The channel number input is finished
and the system tunes to the
corresponding channel.
Branching from the channel number
input menu directly to the presets
!"This function is useful if you have tuned to a
channel in the channel number input menu
and wish to store it as a preset.
Press and hold the controller $ until
the presets appear.
64
XM Satellite Radio mode
Storing channels
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
!"You can store the currently tuned channel in
the channel presets. There are 16 presets
available in the channel preset.
Storing a channel
Tune to the desired channel, see
section "Tuning to channels" on
page 58.
To request the presets: Open the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu, see section
"Opening the XM® Satellite Radio main
menu" on page 57.
In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Presets.
The presets appear.
!Currently tuned channel
"Icon for the currently tuned channel
To select a preset (e.g. preset
number 6): Turn +, the controller $
until the preset number 6 is highlighted.
Storing the currently tuned station in
the preset number 6: Press and hold
the controller $ until the channel is
stored.
or
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Store Channel.
The channel is stored.
65
XM Satellite Radio mode
Settings
Overview
The XM® Radio settings include the
following functions:
Set the display in the upper status line,
see page 66
Set the category filter for the channel
list, see page 66
Show the Radio ID number, see
page 67
Opening the XM® Radio settings
menu
Open the XM® Satellite Radio main
menu, see section "Opening the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu" on page 57.
In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
!Settings menu
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item XM Radio.
The XM® Radio settings menu appears.
!XM® Radio settings menu
Closing the XM® Radio settings
menu
Briefly press the . button.
66
XM Satellite Radio mode
Settings
Set the display in the upper status
line
!"With this function, you can set whether the
channel number or the channel name is
displayed in the upper status line.
Open the XM® Radio settings menu,
see section "Opening the XM® Radio
settings menu" on page 65.
!Status display
"Topmost menu item
#XM® Radio settings menu
The labelling of the topmost menu item
shows the current setting. It will change
with every selection, the status display
changes accordingly.
Possible labellings:
Display by CH Number (Upper status
line shows channel number instead of
channel name)
Display by CH Name (Upper status
line shows channel name instead of
channel number)
To change the setting: In the XM®
Radio settings menu #, select the
topmost menu item ".
Set the category filter for the
channel list
!"With this function, you can set one or more
category filters. After that, only channels
matching to the filter setting are shown in
the channel list. Additionally, the Scan
function plays only channels matching to the
filter setting.
Open the XM® Radio settings menu,
see section "Opening the XM® Radio
settings menu" on page 65.
!Menu item Category Filter
To request the category list: In the
XM® Radio settings menu, select the
menu item Category Filter.
You will see the category list.
67
XM Satellite Radio mode
Settings
!Status display
"Category filter
#Category filter list
To set a category filter: Select the
desired filter .
The status display # changes
accordingly.
Display # = Filter is deactivated
Display $ = Filter is activated
!"You can activate several filters at the same
time. If you activate the filter "All", all other
filters are automatically deactivated.
As soon as you activate one of the other
filters, the filter "All" is automatically
deactivated.
To close the category list and go
back to the XM® Radio settings
menu: Briefly press the . button.
Show the Radio ID number
!"Before using the XM® Satellite Radio
service, you must sign up with the provider
XM Satellite Radio. The provider needs the
Radio ID number.
Open the XM® Radio settings menu,
see section "Opening the XM® Radio
settings menu" on page 65.
!Menu item Radio ID
To show the Radio ID number: Select
the menu item Radio ID.
You will see the Radio ID number.
!"If you have tuned to channel 0, the Radio ID
number will also be displayed in the lower
statusline, see section "Opening the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu" on page 57.
To go back to the XM® Radio settings
menu: Briefly press the . button.
68
XM Satellite Radio mode
Status screens and messages
Status screen
"Channel Unauthorized"
If you try to tune to a non-subscribed
channel, the status screen " shown below
appears.
Additionally, the upper status line shows
the status message ! (CHANNEL
UNAUTHORIZED).
!Status message
"Status screen
To close the status screen: Press the
controller $.
The status screen and status message
disappears and the system tunes to the
channel heard before.
If the currently tuned channel becomes
unauthorized, the same status screen
and the same status message as
described above appears.
To close the status screen: Press the
controller $.
The status screen and status message
disappears and the system tunes to the
channel 1.
Status screen "No signal"
If the received signal is not strong enough,
the status screen " shown below appears.
Additionally, the upper status line shows
the status message ! (NO SIGNAL).
!Status message
"Status screen
To close the status screen: Press the
controller $.
The status screen " disappears, but
the status message ! will be displayed
as long as the received signal is not
strong enough.
In this case, operation of the system is
possible, but the status screen "
appears again, as soon as you try to
tune to another channel.
69
XM Satellite Radio mode
Status screens and messages
If the received signal is strong enough
again, the status message " disappears
and the system tunes automatically to your
last tuned channel.
Status screen "Loading XM"
If the tuner acquires audio or information/
decoding data, the status screen " shown
below appears. Additionally, the upper
status line shows the status message !
(LOADING).
!Status message
"Status screen
To close the status screen: Press the
controller $.
The status screen " disappears, but
the status message ! will be displayed
unitl the process has been finished.
In this state, operation of the system is
possible, but the status screen "
appears again, as soon as you try to
tune to another channel.
If the process has been finished, the
status message " disappears and the
system tunes automatically to your last
tuned channel.
Status screen "Selected XM channel
is no longer available"
If you tune to channel which is no longer
available, the status screen " shown
below appears. Additionally, the upper
status line shows the status message !
(CHANNEL UNAVAILABLE)
!Status message
"Status screen
To close the status screen: Press the
controller $.
The system tunes to the channel heard
before.
Status screen "Check Antenna"
If the antenna is not connected properly,
the status screen " shown below appears.
Additionally, the upper status line shows
the status message !)(CHECK
ANTENNA).
70
XM Satellite Radio mode
Status screens and messages
!Status message
"Status screen
To close the status screen: Press the
controller $.
The status screen " disappears, but
the status message ! will be displayed
until the antenna is connected properly.
Status message "OFF AIR"
If you have tuned to a channel and the
channel goes off air, the upper status line
shows a corresponding status message
!. The channel list shows also the
message, instead of the channel name.
!Status message
71
Disc mode
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Loading the disc changer magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Ejecting the disc changer magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Audio disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Video DVD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Video CD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
72
Disc mode
General information
Safety instructions License notice
Manufactured under license under U.S.
Patent #’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround
are registered trademarks and the DTS
logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS,
Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Automatic video lock-out
!"Switching the gear is described in detail in
the vehicle’s operation manual. Please pay
attention to the corresponding descriptions
and safety instructions in the vehicle’s
operation manual.
In the interest of safety, video CD/DVD
playback is only possible if the gear stick is
in position P.
Else you will see a corresponding message
in the display.
The system switches the picture back on as
soon as the gear stick is in position P.
The video CD/DVD playback sound is not
affected by the lock-out.
WARNING
The Driver Information System is a class 1
laser product.
Invisible laser radiation poses a risk of injury
to the eyes if the cover is opened or
damaged.
Do not open the housing.
The Driver Information System does not
contain any user-serviceable parts.
For safety reasons, any maintenance
work must be performed exclusively by
qualified service experts.
73
Disc mode
General information
Supported discs
The Driver Information System supports
the following CDs and DVDs:
CD-DA (audio CD)
CD-ROM
CD-R/RW
VCD ( video CD)
DVD-Video (single- and dual-layer)
DVD-Audio
DVD-ROM (single- and dual-layer)
DVD-R/RW
!"Audio CDs with copy protection do not
comply with the standard and may not be
able to be played.
It may be possible to play DVD-R and
DVD-RW discs, however this cannot be
guaranteed.
Permissible file systems
ISO9660/Joliet for CDs
UDF for DVDs
Multisession CDs
On multisession CDs, the content of the
first session determines how the Driver
Information System handles the CD.
If the first session contains data in the audio
CD format, for example, and the second
session contains MP3 or wma tracks, the
system will handle the CD as a
conventional audio CD. This means that
the MP3 or wma tracks cannot be
accessed.
If the first session contains MP3 or wma
tracks, for example, and the second
session contains data in the audio CD
format, the system will not handle the CD
as an audio CD. In this case, only the MP3
or wma tracks can be accessed.
Mixed Mode CD/CD-Extra
Mixed Mode CDs are CDs that contain data
in the audio CD format as well as other
data, such as pictures. The Driver
Information System can play back neither
the audio data nor the other data from this
type of CD.
CDs with the designation "CD-Extra" can
have the same content as Mixed Mode
CDs. With CD-Extra CDs, however, the
data is stored in a different manner. The
Driver Information System can play back
the audio data from these CDs.
!"These CDs can also bear the designation
"CD Plus" or "Enhanced CD".
74
Disc mode
General information
MP3 or wma discs
File structure
When creating MP3 or wma discs, you can
organize the tracks into folders. Folders
can also contain further folders
(subfolders). A disc may have a maximum
of 255 folders in total. A maximum of 255
tracks and 255 subfolders are permissible
per folder, with a maximum nesting depth of
8 folder levels.
The system cannot access more deeply
nested folders. The same applies to the
tracks stored in these folders.
A maximum of 4000 tracks in total are
permissible per disc.
Below you will find an example of a file
structure. Track and folder names
When creating MP3 or wma discs, you can
assign names to the tracks and to the
folders. The Driver Information System
uses these names for the corresponding
display when playing the disc. Empty
folders or folders containing data other than
MP3 or wma tracks are not displayed by the
system.
!"The Driver Information System does not
support ID3 tags.
Please note the following when assigning
track names:
Track names must contain at least one
character and should not contain more
than one hundred characters. The
system cannot display names with
more than one hundred characters.
Track names must have the extension
"mp3" (MP3 tracks) or „wma“ (wma
tracks).
A period must appear between the track
name and the extension.
Example of a correct MP3 track name:
Track 1.mp3
The system will not recognize an MP3 or
wma track if:
there is no period between the track
name and the extension
the extension is missing
75
Disc mode
General information
Supported format
The Driver Information System supports
the wma format (without digital rights
management DRM) and the MPEG1 audio
layer 3 format.
!"In everyday speech, the MPEG1 audio layer
3 format has been replaced by the
designation "MP3".
Supported bit and sampling rates
Fixed and variable bit rates up to 320
kbps
Sampling rates from 24 kHz to 48 kHz
!"Only use MP3 or wma tracks with a bit rate
of 128 kbps or higher and with a sampling
rate of 44.1 kHz or higher. Lower rates may
result in audibly impaired quality. This is
particularly true if the surround function is
activated.
Note on copyright
The music tracks that you can create for
MP3 or wma playback or can play back in
MP3 or wma mode are generally copyright-
protected under applicable international
and national laws.
In many countries, the reproduction of
copyrighted material is not permitted, even
if only for personal use, without the express
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Please check the current copyright laws for
your country and comply with them.
These restrictions do not apply,
for example, to your own compositions and
recordings, or to recordings for which
authorization has been obtained from the
copyright holder.
Notes on discs
CAUTION
Do not attach stickers or labels of any kind
to discs. They may come loose and damage
the Driver Information System.
The Driver Information System has been
designed for playback of discs conforming
to the standard IEC 60908. Therefore, only
discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm
(0.0472") can be used. If a thicker disc is
used, the system may be damaged.
Do not use 8 cm (3.15") diameter discs, not
even with an adapter. Only use round, 12
cm (4.72") diameter discs.
Do not insert any other objects than the
discs described above into the disc slot.
Damage to the disc changer may occur.
Do not load warped or poor quality discs into
the magazine as damage to the disc
changer may occur.
(continued)
76
Disc mode
General information
Audio CDs with copy protection do not
comply with the standard and may not
be able to be played.
When playing copied discs, problems
may occur with the playback.
A wide variety of discs, burning
software and burners are available.
Due to this wide variety, we cannot
guarantee that the system will be able
to play every user-burned disc.
There may be problems playing back
user-burned CDs with a storage
capacity of more than 700 MB.
These CDs do not meet current valid
standards.
Notes on the care of discs
Only touch the discs at the edges.
Handle discs with care in order to avoid
malfunctions during playback.
Avoid scratching, leaving fingerprints
and dust on the discs.
Clean the discs occasionally with a
commercially available cleaning cloth.
Always wipe in a straight line from the
inside outwards, never in a circular
motion.
The discs must only be labeld using
pens specially designed for this
purpose.
After use, put the discs back into the
box.
Protect the discs from heat and direct
sunlight.
Notes on playback
If it is raining, at high humidity or after
heating was working, the humidity may
condense at the optical lens of the disc
changer.
In this case, the disc changer can not work
well. Remove the disc from the disc
changer and wait until the optical lens is
dried.
CAUTION
(continued)
Do not attempt to insert more than one disc
into the disc slot at the same time. This will
destroy the disc changer.
Do not attempt to grab or pull a disc out
while it is pulled into the disc changer by the
self-loading mechanism. Damage to the
disc changer and the disc could occur.
Off-road or rough surface driving may cause
the disc to skip. Do not use the disc changer
when driving in such conditions as damage
to the system or to the disc surface could
occur.
77
Disc mode
Loading the disc changer magazine
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Safety instruction
General information
The Driver Information System features a
built-in disc changer magazine with six
compartments.
If the disc is printed on one side, this side
must face upwards when loading the
magazine. If neither side is printed, the side
to be played must face downwards.
Loading the magazine automatically
terminates playback of another disc.
Loading the first available empty
magazine compartment
!"The following description only applies to
scenarios where a mode other than disc
mode is active, for example in telephone
mode.
If you wish to load a magazine compartment
when disc mode is active, please proceed
as described in the section "Loading a
specific empty magazine compartment",
see page 78.
!Disc slot
"#button
Briefly press the # button.
After a short time, the system will
prompt you to insert a disc with the
message Please insert Disc.
WARNING
If you load the magazine when driving, you
may be distracted from the traffic situation,
thus increasing the accident hazard.
Only load the magazine when the vehicle is
stationary.
CAUTION
Only insert a disc into the disc slot ! when
the display shows the message Please
insert Disc. The Driver Information System
may be damaged if you insert a disc before
this message is displayed.
78
Disc mode
Loading the disc changer magazine
Insert a disc into the slot !.
The system will load the disc into the
appropriate magazine compartment
and then play it.
!"If you wait too long before inserting the disc,
the system will abort the loading procedure.
Loading a specific empty magazine
compartment
Opening the Disc main menu
!"You cannot open the Disc main menu
if the magazine is completely ejected.
The message No playable disc
available will appear instead. If this
happens, proceed as described in the
previous section "Loading the first available
empty magazine compartment". The
system will automatically load magazine
compartment 1 in this case.
Press the 2 button.
Either the Disc or the AUX main menu
appears.
If the AUX main menu appears:
Press the 2 button again.
The Disc main menu appears.
or
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the Disc main
menu appears.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to disc mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the 2 button on the control
panel.
!Occupied magazine compartments
"Disc main menu
#Empty magazine compartments
79
Disc mode
Loading the disc changer magazine
Selecting the magazine compartment to
load
Highlight an empty magazine
compartment in the Disc main menu ".
!"If you highlight a magazine compartment
that is already occupied, then the system
will automatically load the disc into the first
available empty compartment.
Loading the selected magazine
compartment
!Disc slot
"#button
Briefly press the # button.
After a short time, the system will
prompt you to insert a disc with the
message Please insert Disc.
Insert a disc into the slot !.
The system will load the disc into the
appropriate magazine compartment
and then play it.
!"If you wait too long before inserting the disc,
the system will abort the loading procedure.
Loading all empty magazine
compartments
!"You can also load all empty magazine
compartments in modes other than disc
mode, for example it also works in
telephone mode.
!Disc slot
"#button
CAUTION
Only insert a disc into the disc slot ! when
the display shows the message Please
insert Disc. The Driver Information System
may be damaged if you insert a disc before
this message is displayed.
80
Disc mode
Loading the disc changer magazine
Press and hold the # button until
you hear a beep sound.
The system prompts you to insert a disc
with the message Please insert Disc.
Insert a disc into the slot !.
The system will load the disc and once
more prompt you to insert the next disc
with the message Please insert Disc.
!"If you wait too long before inserting the disc
or do not load a further disc, the system will
stop the loading procedure and play the last
inserted disc.
Repeat the last step after each prompt
until all of the magazine compartments
have been loaded.
After the last magazine compartment
has been loaded, the system will
automatically play the appropriate disc.
CAUTION
Only insert a disc into the disc slot ! when
the display shows the message Please
insert Disc. The Driver Information System
may be damaged if you insert a disc before
this message is displayed.
81
Disc mode
Ejecting the disc changer magazine
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Ejecting the magazine compartment
containing the last disc played
!"You can also eject this magazine
compartment if a mode other than disc
mode is active, for example in telephone
mode. If the last disc played is no longer
available, the system will eject the first
available occupied magazine compartment.
If you wish to eject a specific magazine
compartment when disc mode is active,
please proceed as described in the section
"Ejecting a specific magazine
compartment", see page 81.
!Disc slot
""button
Briefly press the " button.
The system will eject the respective
disc.
Remove the disc from the slot !.
!"If you wait too long before removing the disc,
the system will automatically pull it back in
after a certain time.
Ejecting a specific magazine
compartment
Press the 2 button.
Either the Disc or the AUX main menu
appears.
If the AUX main menu appears:
Press the 2 button again.
The Disc main menu appears.
or
WARNING
If you eject the magazine when driving, you
may be distracted from the traffic situation,
thus increasing the accident hazard.
Only eject the magazine when the vehicle is
stationary.
If the disc slot is obstructed and you eject
the magazine, this may cause fire or
electrical shock and may damage the
system.
Only eject the magazine if the disc slot is not
obstructed.
82
Disc mode
Ejecting the disc changer magazine
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the Disc main
menu appears.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to disc mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the 2 button on the control
panel.
!Occupied magazine compartments
"Disc main menu
#Empty magazine compartments
Selecting the magazine compartment to
eject
Highlight an occupied magazine
compartment in the Disc main menu.
!"If you highlight a magazine compartment
that is already empty, then the system will
eject the disc currently playing.
Ejecting the selected magazine
compartment
!Disc slot
""button
Briefly press the " button.
The system will eject the disc.
Remove the disc from the slot !.
!"If you wait too long before removing the disc,
the system will automatically pull it back in
after a certain time.
Ejecting all magazine
compartments
!"You can also eject all magazine
compartments in modes other than disc
mode, for example it also works in
telephone mode.
!Disc slot
""button
83
Disc mode
Ejecting the disc changer magazine
Press and hold the " button until the
first disc will be ejected.
Remove the disc from the slot !.
The system will eject the next disc.
!"If you wait too long before removing the disc,
the system will automatically pull it back in
after a certain time and abort ejecting of the
magazine compartments.
Repeat the last step until the magazine
is empty.
84
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Switching to disc mode and starting
audio disc playback
Option 1
Load the magazine with an appropriate
disc, see the section "Loading the disc
changer magazine" from page 77.
Option 2
Press the 2 button.
The system will switch to either disc or
AUX mode.
If the system switches to AUX mode:
Press the 2 button again.
or
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until disc mode
appears in the display.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to disc mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the 2 button on the control
panel.
The system will resume playing the last
disc played if available, otherwise it will play
the next available disc.
If it is a video disc, please select an audio
CD in the Disc main menu, see the section
"Selecting and playing discs" on page 96.
If the magazine is empty, the message No
playable disc available appears. If this
happens, load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section "Loading
the disc changer magazine" from page 77.
Disc main menu
During playback of an audio CD
!Mode display
"Disc main menu with list of discs
#Disc icon
$Track currently playing
%Track list of the disc currently playing
&Name of the disc currently playing
'Play icon % for the track currently
playing
(Disc currently playing
*Icon for an audio CD
+Play icon % for the disc currently
playing
85
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
During playback of an MP3 or wma CD
!Mode display
"Disc main menu with list of discs
#Disc icon
$Track currently playing
%Track or folder list of the disc currently
playing
&Name of the disc currently playing
'Play icon % for the track currently
playing or the current folder
(Disc currently playing
*Icon for an MP3 CD
+Play icon % for the disc currently
playing
!"The display & shows also the folder
currently playing if the track currently
playing is stored in a folder.
During playback of an audio DVD
!Mode display
"Disc main menu with list of discs
#Disc icon
$Track currently playing
%Track list of the disc currently playing
&Name of the disc currently playing
'Play icon % for the track currently
playing
(Disc currently playing
*Icon for an audio DVD
+Play icon % for the disc currently
playing
Displaying the disc, track and folder
names
The list of discs in the Disc main menu "
shows the discs available in the magazine
by their names, provided the names are
stored on the discs. If there are no names
stored, the respective disc type is
displayed.
The track or folder list % shows the tracks
or folders on the disc currently playing.
In the case of audio CDs and audio DVDs,
the tracks are displayed with their names if
the names are stored on the disc. If there
are no names stored, "Track" followed by
the appropriate track number is displayed.
In the case of MP3 or wma CDs, the system
uses the names assigned during creation
of the CD to display the CD, track and
folder names. Any ID3 tags in the files are
ignored.
86
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
If a track or folder name is too long, the
system will display it in abbreviated form.
This is indicated by the three dots "…" at
the end of the name. If this happens, you
can call up a complete name display.
!Abreviated track name
Calling up a complete name display
To open the Options menu: Highlight
the desired track or folder and push &
the controller $.
!Options menu
To call up a track name display: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Details.
After selecting the menu item Details,
the complete track name display
appears.
To close the display: Press the
controller $.
Unknown discs
Discs that have not yet been played after
the magazine has been loaded are not
known to the system. They are displayed
as follows.
!Icon for an unknown disc
"Display for the unknown content of the
unknown disc
As soon as an unknown disc is played,
display takes place as previously described
in the section "Displaying the disc, track
and folder names", see page 85.
87
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
The system does not store the data,
therefore after a disc is removed from the
magazine and reinserted at a later date, it
may be unknown to the system once more.
Selecting and playing discs
Selecting using the central control
panel
!Icon for a video CD
"Icon for a video DVD
#Icon for an audio DVD
$Icon for an audio CD
%Icon for an MP3 CD
&Disc main menu with list of discs
'Play icon % for the disc currently
playing
Select an audio disc in the list of discs
in the Disc main menu.
Selecting using the steering wheel
Press and hold the 4 or 5 button.
The system will play the previous or
next disc, depending on the button
pressed.
!"The previous or next disc may also be a
video disc, depending on how the magazine
compartments are loaded.
Pausing or resuming playback
!Play icon %
"Track currently playing (highlighted)
To pause: Highlight the track currently
playing and press the controller $.
The play icon % will change to the
pause icon &.
To resume: Highlight the track
currently playing once more and press
the controller $.
The pause icon & will change to the
play icon %.
Selecting tracks
Skipping tracks forward/back
Briefly press the 5 or 4 button on
the steering wheel.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the button pressed.
!"'Skip track forward' skips to the next track.
'Skip track back' skips to the beginning
of the current track, if the track has been
playing for more than 10 seconds. If the
track has been playing for less than
10 seconds, it will skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
88
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
Track list
!"You can select a specific track for playback
directly in the track list.
Select the desired track in the track list.
Selecting folders and MP3 or wma
tracks
!"This function is only available for MP3 or
wma CDs. Folders can only be selected if
the MP3 or wma tracks were organized into
folders when the CD was created.
!Menu item for the folder change
function
"Folder
#Play icon % for track currently playing
$Track
%Highlighted track
To switch to the next folder level up:
Select the menu item !.
The display will change accordingly.
To open a folder: Select the desired
folder.
You will see the tracks stored in this
folder.
To play a track: Select the desired
track.
Selecting a group
!"This function is only available for audio
DVDs. The music tracks on an audio DVD
can be organized into up to nine groups.
To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
To open the Group menu: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Change Group.
The Group menu appears. The group
currently being played is marked with
the play icon %.
!Play icon %
"Group menu
89
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
Select the desired group.
The system will play the first track in the
chosen group.
Fast forwarding/reversing
To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push & the controller $.
!Options menu
To start forwarding: In the Options
menu, select the menu item FF and
press and hold the controller $.
or
To start reversing: In the Options
menu, select the menu item REW and
press and hold the controller $.
To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the controller $.
!"During fast forwarding/reversing the track
time changes are displayed in the upper
status line.
Repeating tracks or folders
!"This function will keep repeating a track or
folder until it is cancelled. In the case of MP3
or wma CDs, repetition of folders is only
possible if the CD contains folders. Tracks
in subfolders within the folder to be repeated
will be ignored.
Highlight the desired track or folder.
!Folder
"Highlighted track
#Track
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
!Status display
"Options menu
To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Repeat Track or Repeat Folder.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display ! changes accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
90
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
When the function is switched on, the icon
(repeat track) or (repeat folder)
additionally appears on the right in the top
status line.
!"The repeat track function switches off
automatically when you select another
track.
The repeat folder function switches off
automatically when you select a track in
another folder.
Both functions are switching off
automatically when you:
eject a magazine compartment,
select another disc,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Random play
Switching random play of all tracks
on/off
!"Random play of all tracks plays all tracks on
a current audio or MP3 or wma CD in
random order.
In the case of audio DVDs, random play is
restricted to the tracks in the currently active
group.
Highlight the track currently playing.
!Highlighted track currently playing.
!"You can tell the track currently playing by the
play icon %.
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
!Status display
"Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Random Disc.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The status display ! changes
accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
91
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
When the function is switched on, the
icon additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
!"The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
eject a magazine compartment,
select another disc,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Switching random play within a specific
folder on/off
!"Random play within a specific folder only
applies to MP3 or wma CDs. It plays all
tracks in a specific folder in random order.
Tracks in subfolders within the specific
folder will be ignored.
Highlight the desired folder.
!Highlighted folder
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
!Status display
"Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Random Folder.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The status display ! changes
accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
When the function is switched on, the
icon additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
!"The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
eject a magazine compartment,
select another disc,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
92
Disc mode
Audio disc playback
Scan function
!"This function plays about 10 seconds of
each track on the disc currently playing and
then skips to the next track.
Highlight the track from which you want
the function to start.
!Highlighted track
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
!Options menu
To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Scan.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
When the function is switched on, the
icon appears on the right in the
top status line.
!"The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
eject a magazine compartment,
select another disc,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
It also switches off automatically when it
reaches the track where it started.
93
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Video DVD playback conditions
!"Retailers supply video DVDs that do not
meet the standards.
These video DVDs may cause picture,
sound or other playback problems.
DVD region code
Most of the video DVDs are encoded with a
region code intended to restrict the area of
the world in which they can be played.
Information about which region code a
DVD has can usually be found either on the
video DVD itself or on the sleeve.
In order to play a video DVD, the video
DVD and the video DVD player must have
the same region code.
Below you will find the possible region
codes and the countries assigned.
For example, DVD players sold in the
U.S.A. have the region code 2, and video
DVDs sold in the U.S.A. can have the
region code 0 or 2.
So, if you insert a DVD with a region code
except 0 or 2 into an U.S.A. DVD player
(e.g. the disc changer of the Driver
Information System), the DVD will not be
played.
Region
code Country
0 No region code (DVD can be
played with all DVD players
independently of the player’s
region code)
1 Bermuda, Canada, Cayman
Islands, U.S.A. and U.S.A.
territories
2 Egypt, Europe, Greenland,
Japan, Lesotho, Middle East,
South Africa, Swaziland
3 Hongkong, Macau, Parts of
South East Asia,
South Korea, Taiwan,
The Philippines
4 Australia, Central America,
Latin America (including
Mexico), New Guinea,
New Zealand, Oceania,
Papua, The Caribbean
Region
code Country
5 African countries not
explicitly included in other
regions, Indian subcontinent,
Mongolia, North Korea,
Seychelles, countries
included in the former
Soviet Union
6 China (except Macau and
Hongkong)
7 Reserved
8 Cruise ships, Airlines etc.
94
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
TV Standard
The Driver Information System can play
video DVDs that meet PAL or NTSC TV
standard.
Information on this can usually be found
either on the DVD itself or on the DVD
sleeve.
Functional restrictions
It may be the case that some functions or
actions may not be possible at certain
times, or may not be possible in general,
depending on the video DVD.
When such functions or actions are
activated, they are indicated by the icon
in the top left corner of the display.
!Icon
Switching to disc mode and starting
video DVD playback
Option 1
Load the magazine with an appropriate
disc, see the section "Loading the disc
changer magazine" from page 77.
Option 2
Press the 2 button.
The system will switch to either disc or
AUX mode.
If the system switches to AUX mode:
Press the 2 button again.
Option 3
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until disc mode
appears in the display.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to disc mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the 2 button on the control
panel.
The system will resume playing the last
disc played if available, otherwise it will play
the next available disc.
If it is an audio disc, please select a
video DVD in the Disc main menu, see
the section "Selecting and playing
discs" on page 87.
If it is a video CD, please select a video
DVD in the Disc main menu, see the
section "Selecting and playing discs" on
page 96.
95
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
If the magazine is empty, the message No
playable disc available appears. If this
happens, load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section "Loading
the disc changer magazine" from page 77.
Playback will not start if the DVD has the
wrong region code. Instead you will see an
appropriate message.
After video playback starts, the system will
show the video content as a full-screen
display.
You can open the following menus during
playback:
Disc main menu, see page 95
Native DVD menu, see page 100
On-screen menu, see page 105
Disc main menu
Opening the Disc main menu
During video playback, press and hold
the . button until the Disc main
menu appears.
!"Video playback continues in the background
when the Disc main menu is open.
!Mode display
"Disc main menu with list of discs
#Disc icon
$Chapter currently playing
%Content area with native DVD menu
&Name of the disc currently playing
'Open the Settings menu
(Disc currently playing
*Icon for a video DVD
+Play icon % for the disc currently
playing
Closing the Disc main menu and
returning to video full-screen display
In the content area % with the native
DVD menu select the menu item
Return to Screen.
or
Press the 2 button.
Displaying the disc name
The list of discs in the Disc main menu "
shows the discs available in the magazine
by their names, provided the names are
stored on the discs. If there are no names
stored, the respective disc type will be
displayed.
If a video DVD is highlighted in the list of
discs in the Disc main menu ", then the
content area % will display the native DVD
menu if the DVD has the correct region
code.
If it does not have the correct region code,
the content area % will display an
appropriate message.
96
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
Unknown discs
Discs that have not yet been played after
the magazine has been loaded are not
known to the system. They are displayed
as follows.
!Icon for an unknown disc
"Display for the unknown content of
the unknown disc
As soon as an unknown disc is played,
display takes place as previously described
in the section "Displaying the disc name",
see page 95.
The system does not store the data,
therefore after a disc is removed from the
magazine and reinserted at a later date, it
may be unknown to the system once more.
Selecting and playing discs
Selecting using the central control
panel
To open the Disc main menu: During
video playback, press and hold
the . button until the Disc main
menu appears.
!Icon for a video CD
"Icon for a video DVD
#Icon for an audio DVD
$Icon for an audio CD
%Icon for an MP3 CD
&Disc main menu with list of discs
'Play icon % for the disc currently
playing
To play a disc: Select a video DVD in
the Disc main menu &.
Selecting using the steering wheel
Press and hold the 4 or 5 button.
The system will play the previous or
next disc, depending on the button
pressed.
!"The previous or next disc may also be an
audio disc or a video CD, depending on how
the magazine compartments are loaded.
Selecting chapters
!"If a film contains chapters, you can use the
chapter list or the chapter skip function to
select a chapter for playback.
Chapter list
This function is described in the section
"Native DVD menu", see page 100.
97
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
Skipping chapters forward/back
!"These two functions are also available in the
on-screen menu, see the section "Skipping
chapters forward/back" on page 107.
Briefly press the 5 or 4 button on
the steering wheel.
The system will execute the chapter
skip corresponding to the button
pressed.
Selecting titles
This function is described in the section
"Native DVD menu", see page 100.
Switching subtitles on/off
This function is described in the section
"Native DVD menu", see page 100.
Switching audio track
This function is described in the section
"Native DVD menu", see page 100.
Switching viewing angle
This function is described in the section
"Native DVD menu", see page 100.
Audio settings
Please see the section "Audio settings" on
page 34 for a description of the audio
settings.
Video settings
Open the Video Settings menu
During video playback, press and hold
the . button until the Disc main
menu appears.
In the Disc main menu, select the menu
item Settings.
A selection menu appears.
!Selection menu
In the selection menu, select the menu
item Video.
The Video Settings menu appears.
!Video settings menu
98
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
The Video Settings menu includes the
following functions:
Aspect ratio, see page 98
Brightness, color and contrast, see
page 98
Video reset, see page 99
Close the Video Settings menu
Briefly press the . button.
Aspect ratio
Open the Video settings menu, see
section "Open the Video Settings
menu" on page 97.
!Video settings menu
To open the Aspect Ratio menu: In
the Video Settings menu, select the
menu item Aspect Ratio.
The Aspect Ratio menu appears.
!Icon " for currently active setting
To set the aspect ratio: Select the
desired setting.
Brightness, color and contrast
Open the Video settings menu, see
section "Open the Video Settings
menu" on page 97.
!Video settings menu
To open the desired menu: In the
Video Settings menu, select either the
menu item Brightness, Color or
Contrast.
The corresponding menu appears.
99
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
The illustration shows the brightness setting
!Scale for the brightness setting
"Indicator
The position of the indicator " on the scale
! shows the current setting.
Turn +, the controller $ until the
desired setting is reached.
The system saves this setting
automatically.
To close the menu: Press the
controller $.
or
Briefly press the . or 2 button.
Video reset
You can use the video reset function to
reset the following settings to their factory
settings:
Aspect ratio
Brightness
Color
Contrast
Open the Video settings menu, see
section "Open the Video Settings
menu" on page 97.
!Video settings menu
To open the Video Reset menu: In the
Video Settings menu, select the menu
item Reset Video Settings.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to reset the video settings.
Select Yes or No.
The system will or will not reset the
video settings, depending on the
answer you select.
100
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
Language settings
!"After starting DVD playback, some DVDs
will show a language menu. In this language
menu a specific language is marked by
default, it depends on the DVD content.
With the language settings you can set a
different language which should be marked
in the language menu as default in future.
If the DVD does not contain that different
language, the DVD depending language is
marked by default.
This setting is applied only when a DVD is
inserted, changing this setting during
playback does not have an effect.
To open the Language Settings
menu: During video playback, press
and hold the . button until the Disc
main menu appears.
Select the menu item Settings.
A selection menu appears.
!Selection menu
In the selection menu, select the menu
item Menu Language.
The Language menu appears.
!Icon " for currently active setting
To change the language: Select the
desired language.
Native DVD menu
!Native DVD menu
The native DVD menu includes the
following functions:
Closing the native DVD menu and
returning to video full-screen display,
see page 101
DVD top menu/DVD menu, see
page 101
Chapter list, see page 102
Selecting titles, see page 103
101
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
Switching subtitles on/off, see page 103
Switching audio track, see page 104
Switching viewing angle, see page 104
!"Depending on the content of the DVD
currently playing, certain menu items may
have no function even though they are
displayed.
Opening the native DVD menu
!"This function is also available in the
on-screen menu, see the section "Opening
the native DVD menu" on page 105.
During video playback, briefly press
the . button.
The native DVD menu appears
(video playback continues invisibly in
the background).
!Native DVD menu
Closing the native DVD menu and
returning to video full-screen display
In the native DVD menu, select the
menu item Return to Screen.
or
Press the 2 button.
DVD top menu/DVD menu
!"The DVD top menu or DVD menu is stored
on the DVD itself. The content, structure
and language of the menus as well as the
available menu items will vary depending on
the DVD.
You can also set the menu language in the
language settings, see page 100.
Open the native DVD menu, see
section "Opening the native DVD
menu" on page 101.
!Native DVD menu
102
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
To open the desired menu: In the
native DVD menu, select the menu item
DVD Top Menu or DVD Menu.
The relevant menu appears as a full-
screen display.
!Menu items
To select a menu item: Turn +, the
controller $.
or
Push '( %& the controller $.
To confirm selection: Press the
controller $.
To exit the menu: Select the
corresponding menu item and confirm.
Chapter list
!"You can select a specific chapter for
playback directly in the chapter list.
Open the native DVD menu, see
section "Opening the native DVD
menu" on page 101.
!Native DVD menu
To call up the chapter list: In the
native DVD menu, select the menu item
Chapter List.
The chapter list appears.
!Chapter currently playing (icon )
To play a chapter: Select the desired
chapter.
103
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
Selecting titles
!"If a DVD contains several titles or films, you
can select a specific title or film for playback
directly in the title list.
Open the native DVD menu, see
section "Opening the native DVD
menu" on page 101.
!Native DVD menu
To call up the title list: In the native
DVD menu, select the menu item Title
List.
The title list appears.
!Play icon for title currently playing
To select a title or film: Select the
desired title or film.
Switching subtitles on/off
!"If a DVD contains subtitles, you can switch
them on or off in the Subtitle menu. The
number and language of the subtitles will
vary depending on the DVD.
Open the native DVD menu, see
page 101.
!Native DVD menu
To open the Subtitle menu: In the
native DVD menu, select the menu item
Subtitle.
The Subtitle menu appears.
104
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
To switch subtitles on: Select the
desired subtitles.
To switch subtitles off: Select the
respective menu item.
Switching audio track
!"If a DVD contains several audio tracks, you
can switch between them in the Audio Track
menu. The number and languages of the
audio tracks will vary depending on the
DVD.
Open the native DVD menu, see
page 101.
!Native DVD menu
To open the Audio Track menu: In the
native DVD menu, select the menu item
Audio Track.
The Audio Track menu appears.
To switch audio track: Select the
desired audio track.
Switching viewing angle
!"If a title or film contains several viewing
angles (camera angles), you can switch
between them in the Angle menu. The
number of viewing angles will vary
depending on the DVD.
Open the native DVD menu, see
section "Opening the native DVD
menu" on page 101.
!Native DVD menu
To open the Angle menu: In the native
DVD menu, select the menu item
Angle.
The Angle menu appears.
To switch viewing angle: Select the
desired viewing angle.
105
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
On-screen menu
You can call up the following in the
on-screen menu:
The native DVD menu, see page 105.
The chapter list, see page 106.
In addition you can control the following
playback functions:
Pausing or resuming playback, see
page 107
Skipping chapters forward/back, see
page 107
Fast forwarding/reversing, see
page 107
Depending on the content of the DVD
currently playing, certain menu items may
have no function even though they are
displayed.
Opening the on-screen menu
!"You cannot open the on-screen menu if the
DVD top menu or DVD menu stored on the
DVD is open.
During video playback, press the
controller $.
The on-screen menu will be shown over
the video currently playing.
!Pause/resume playback
"Skip chapter back
#Skip chapter forward
$Open the native DVD menu
%Close the on-screen menu
&Call up the chapter list
'Fast reverse
(Fast forward
*Shows the selected menu item ! - (
Closing the on-screen menu
In the on-screen menu, select the menu
item %.
or
Briefly press the . button.
or
Do nothing and wait until the on-screen
menu is automatically closed.
Opening the native DVD menu
!"This function is also available outside the
on-screen menu, see the section "Opening
the native DVD menu" on page 101.
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 105.
106
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
!On-screen menu
"Menu item
To open the native DVD menu: In the
on-screen menu !, select the menu
item ".
The native DVD menu will be shown
over the video currently playing.
Please see the section "Native DVD
menu" on page 100 for a description of
the menu functions.
!"The menu item Return to Screen
described in this section is not available
if you open the native DVD menu as
described above and not as described
there.
To close the native DVD menu: Briefly
press the . button or do nothing and
wait until the menu is automatically
closed.
Calling up the chapter list
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 105.
!Menu item
"On-screen menu
To call up the chapter list: In the on-
screen menu ", select the menu item
!.
The chapter list will be shown over the
video currently playing.
!Chapter currently playing (icon )
To play a chapter: Select the desired
chapter from the chapter list.
107
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
Pausing or resuming playback
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 105.
!Menu item
"On-screen menu
To pause or resume playback: In the
on-screen menu ", select the menu
item !.
The system will pause or resume
playback, depending on the previous
status.
Skipping chapters forward/back
!"These two functions are also available on
the steering wheel, see the section
"Skipping chapters forward/back" on
page 97.
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 105.
!On-screen menu
"Skipping chapters back
#Skipping chapters forward
To skip chapters: In the on-screen
menu !, select the menu item " or
#.
The system will execute the chapter
skip corresponding to the menu item
selected.
Fast forwarding/reversing
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 105.
!Fast reversing
"Fast forwarding
#On-screen menu
108
Disc mode
Video DVD playback
To start fast forwarding/reversing: In
the on-screen menu #, select the
menu item ! or " and press and hold
the controller $.
The system will start fast forwarding
or fast reversing depending on the
selection. The sound is muted during
this.
To terminate fast forwarding/
reversing: Release the controller $.
109
Disc mode
Video CD playback
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Functional restrictions
It may be the case that some functions or
actions may not be possible at certain
times, or may not be possible in general,
depending on the video CD.
When such functions or actions are
activated, they are indicated by the icon
in the display.
!Icon
Notes on PBC (PlayBack Control)
PBC is a feature that allows users to
navigate the content of a VCD (in
MPEG1 version 2.0 VCD) with one or
more interactive menus.
PBC feature only works with VCD
version 2.0.
PBC feature may have different
behavior depending on how the VCD
was developed.
Switching to disc mode and starting
video CD playback
Option 1
Load the magazine with an appropriate
disc, see the section "Loading the disc
changer magazine" from page 77.
Option 2
Press the 2 button.
The system will switch to either disc or
AUX mode.
If the system switches to AUX mode:
Press the 2 button again.
Option 3
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until disc mode
appears in the display.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to disc mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the 2 button on the control
panel.
The system will resume playing the last
disc played if available, otherwise it will play
the next available disc.
110
Disc mode
Video CD playback
If it is an audio disc, please select a video
CD in the Disc main menu, see the section
"Selecting and playing discs" on page 87.
If it is a video DVD, please select a video
CD in the Disc main menu, see the section
"Disc main menu" on page 110.
If the magazine is empty, the message No
playable disc available appears. If this
happens, load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section "Loading
the disc changer magazine" from page 77.
After video playback starts, the system will
show the video content as a full-screen
display. You will see either the film or the
PBC (Playback Control) menu stored on
the video CD.
What you see depends on the video CD
itself and also on whether the display of the
PBC menu is switched on or off.
You can switch the display of the PBC
menu on or off in the native video CD
menu, see page 112.
You can open the following menus during
playback:
Disc main menu, see page 110
Native video CD menu, see page 112
On-screen menu, see page 116
Disc main menu
Opening the Disc main menu
During video playback, press and hold
the . button until the Disc main
menu appears.
!Mode display
"Disc main menu with list of discs
#Disc icon
$Track currently playing
%Content area with native video CD
menu
&Name of the disc currently playing
'Open the Settings menu
(Disc currently playing
*Icon for a video CD
+Play % icon for the disc currently
playing
!"Video playback continues in the background
when the Disc main menu is open.
Closing the Disc main menu and
returning to video playback
Press the 2 button.
Displaying the disc name
The list of discs in the Disc main menu "
shows the discs available in the magazine
by their names, provided the names are
stored on the discs. If there are no names
stored, the respective disc type will be
displayed.
111
Disc mode
Video CD playback
If a video CD is highlighted in the list of
discs in the Disc main menu ", then the
content area % will display the native video
CD menu.
Unknown discs
Discs that have not yet been played after
the magazine has been loaded are not
known to the system. They are displayed
as follows.
!Icon for an unknown disc
"Display for the unknown content of the
unknown disc
As soon as an unknown disc is played,
display takes place as previously described
in the section "Displaying the disc name",
see page 110.
The system does not store the data,
therefore after a disc is removed from the
magazine and reinserted at a later date, it
may be unknown to the system once more.
Selecting and playing discs
Selecting using the central control
panel
To open the Disc main menu: During
video playback, press and hold
the . button until the Disc main
menu appears.
!Icon for a video CD
"Icon for a video DVD
#Icon for an audio DVD
$Icon for an audio CD
%Icon for an MP3 CD
&Disc main menu with list of discs
'Play icon % for the disc currently
playing
To play a disc: Select a video CD in the
Disc main menu &.
112
Disc mode
Video CD playback
Selecting using the steering wheel
Press and hold the 4 or 5 button.
The system will play the previous or
next disc, depending on the button
pressed.
!"The previous or next disc may also be an
audio disc or a video DVD, depending on
how the magazine compartments are
loaded.
Selecting tracks
If a video CD contains several tracks, you
can use the track list or the track skip
function to select a track for playback.
Calling up the track list
!"You can select a specific track for playback
directly in the track list.
This function is described in the section
"Native video CD menu", see page 112.
Skipping tracks forward/back
!"These two functions are also available in the
following menus:
PBC menu, see page 114
On-screen menu, see page 116
Briefly press the 5 or 4 button on
the steering wheel.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the button pressed.
Video settings
Please see the section "Video settings" on
page 97 for a description of the video
settings.
Audio settings
Please see the section "Audio settings" on
page 34 for a description of the audio
settings.
Native video CD menu
!Native video CD menu
The native video CD menu includes the
following functions:
Closing the native video CD menu and
returning to video playback, see
page 113
Switching the display of the PBC
(Playback Control) menu on/off, see
page 113
PBC menu, see page 114
Calling up the track list, see page 115
113
Disc mode
Video CD playback
!"Depending on the content of the video CD
currently playing, certain menu items may
have no function even though they are
displayed.
Opening the native video CD menu
!"This function is also available in the on-
screen menu, see the section "Opening the
native video CD menu" on page 117.
During video playback, briefly press
the . button.
The native video CD menu appears
(video playback continues in the
background).
Closing the native video CD menu and
returning to video playback
In the native video CD menu, select the
menu item Return to Screen.
or
Press the 2 button.
In both cases you will see either the film
or the PBC (Playback Control) menu
stored on the video CD. What you see
depends on the video CD itself and also
on whether the display of the PBC
menu is switched on or off.
A description of how to switch the
display on/off appears below.
Switching the display of the PBC
(Playback Control) menu on/off
Open the native video CD menu, see
section "Opening the native video CD
menu" on page 113.
!Native video CD menu
In the native video CD menu, select the
menu item PBC on.
!Status display
"Menu item PBC on
#Native video CD menu
Depending on the previous status, the
display of the menu will be switched on
or off. The status display ! changes
accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
114
Disc mode
Video CD playback
!"When the display of the PBC menu is
switched on, PBC appears on the right in the
top status line.
The display of the PBC menu is
automatically switched off as soon as you
play another disc.
PBC menu
!"The PBC menu is stored on the video CD
itself. The individual tracks on the video CD
are accessed via the PBC menu. The
content and structure of the menu as well
as the available menu items will vary
depending on the video CD.
Opening the PBC menu
!"This function is also available in the on-
screen menu, see the section "Opening the
PBC menu or calling up the track list" on
page 117.
Open the native video CD menu, see
section "Opening the native video CD
menu" on page 113.
!Native video CD menu
To open the PBC menu: In the native
video CD menu, select the menu item
PBC Menu.
You will see the PBC menu in full-
screen mode and the speller.
!PBC menu
"Individual tracks
#Speller
$Change to the next PBC page
%Delete entered track number
&Menu item OK
'Change to the previous PBC page
(Shows the selected speller menu item
The individual tracks are numbered in the
PBC menu !.
115
Disc mode
Video CD playback
The speller # provides the following
functions:
Entering a track number from 0 to 99
Skipping tracks or changing the PBC
menu page
Entering track numbers
Single-digit track number: In the
speller, highlight the desired digit by
turning +, the controller $ and press
the controller $.
Two-digit track number: In the speller,
highlight the first digit by turning +, the
controller $ and press the
controller $, then highlight the second
digit and again press the controller $.
!"After you enter the second digit, the menu
item OK is automatically highlighted. You
can now confirm or clear the entry.
To completely clear an entry: In the
speller, select the menu item % .
You can then enter a new number.
To confirm an entry: In the speller,
select the menu item OK.
If the entry is not valid, you can enter a
new number after a short time.
If the entry is valid, the PBC menu is
automatically closed and the
corresponding track started.
Changing the PBC menu page
To change to the next PBC menu
page: In the speller, select the menu
item $.
To change to the previous PBC
menu page: In the speller, select the
menu item '.
Back to the native video CD menu
Briefly press the . button.
Calling up the track list
!"This function is also available in the on-
screen menu, see the section "Opening the
PBC menu or calling up the track list" on
page 117.
If a video CD contains several tracks, you
can use the track list to directly select a
specific track for playback.
Open the native video CD menu, see
section "Opening the native video CD
menu" on page 113.
!Native video CD menu
116
Disc mode
Video CD playback
To call up the track list: In the native
video CD menu, select the menu item
Track List.
The track list appears.
!Play icon for the track currently
playing
"Track list
To play a track: Select the desired
track.
On-screen menu
You can call up the following in the on-
screen menu:
The native video CD menu, see
page 117.
Either the PBC menu or the track list,
see page 117.
In addition you can control the following
playback functions:
Pausing or resuming playback, see
page 107
Skipping tracks forward/back, see
page 118
Fast forwarding/reversing, see
page 119
Depending on the content of the video CD
currently playing, certain menu items may
have no function even though they are
displayed.
Opening the on-screen menu
During video playback, press the
controller $.
The on-screen menu will be shown over
the video currently playing.
!Pause/resume playback
"Skip track back
#Skip track forward
$Open the native video CD menu
%Close the on-screen menu
&Open the PBC menu or call up the track
list
'Fast reverse
(Fast forward
*Shows the selected menu item ! - (
117
Disc mode
Video CD playback
Closing the on-screen menu
In the on-screen menu, select the menu
item % .
or
Briefly press the . button.
or
Do nothing and wait until the on-screen
menu is automatically closed.
Opening the native video CD menu
!"This function is also available outside the
on-screen menu, see the section "Opening
the native video CD menu" on page 113.
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 116.
!On-screen menu
"Menu item
To open the native video CD menu:
In the on-screen menu !, select the
menu item ".
The native video CD menu will be
shown over the video currently playing.
Please see page 112 for a description
of the native video CD menu.
!"The menu item Return to Screen described
in this section is not available if you open the
native video CD menu as described above.
To close the native video CD menu:
Briefly press the . button or do
nothing and wait until the menu is
automatically closed.
Opening the PBC menu or calling up the
track list
!"These two functions are also available
outside the on-screen menu, see the
section "Opening the PBC menu" on
page 114 or the section "Calling up the track
list" on page 115.
To open the PBC menu, the display of the
PBC menu must be switched on in the
native video CD menu, see the section
"Native video CD menu" on page 112. To
call up the track list, the display of the PBC
menu must be switched off there.
118
Disc mode
Video CD playback
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 116.
!Menu item
"On-screen menu
In the on-screen menu ", select the
menu item !.
Either the PBC menu or the track list will
be shown over the video currently
playing, depending on whether the
display of the PBC menu is switched on
or off.
Please see page 114 for a description
of the PBC menu.
To play a track: Select the desired
track in the track list.
Pausing or resuming playback
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 116.
!Menu item
"On-screen menu
To pause or resume playback: In the
on-screen menu ", select the menu
item !.
The system will pause or resume
playback, depending on the previous
status.
Skipping tracks forward/back
!"These two functions are also available
outside the on-screen menu:
on the steering wheel, see page 112
in the PBC menu, see page 114
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 116.
119
Disc mode
Video CD playback
!On-screen menu
"Skipping tracks back
#Skipping tracks forward
In the on-screen menu, select the menu
item " or #.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the menu item selected.
Fast forwarding/reversing
Open the on-screen menu, see section
"Opening the on-screen menu" on
page 116.
!Fast reversing
"Fast forwarding
#On-screen menu
To start fast forwarding/reversing: In
the on-screen menu, select the menu
item ( or ' and press and hold the
controller $.
The system will start fast forwarding or
fast reversing depending on the
selection. The sound is muted during
this.
To terminate fast forwarding/
reversing: Release the controller $.
120
Disc mode
Video CD playback
121
AUX mode
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Signal sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
iPod playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
USB playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
AUX playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
122
AUX mode
General information
Trademarks
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Note on copyright
The audio files that you can create to store
on an iPod® or a USB memory stick or that
you can play using the iPod® or from the
USB memory stick are generally copyright-
protected under applicable international
and national laws.
In many countries, the reproduction of
copyrighted material is not permitted, even
if only for personal use, without the express
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Please check the current copyright laws for
your country and comply with them.
These restrictions do not apply,
for example, to your own compositions and
recordings, or to recordings for which
authorization has been obtained from the
copyright holder.
123
AUX mode
Signal sources
Supported signal sources
You can connect the following signal
sources to the Driver Information System:
3rd to 5th generation iPod®
iPod® Mini
USB memory stick containing audio
files
AUX signal source (commercially
available audio/video signal source)
!"The system can only access the audio files
on an iPod®. Picture or video files cannot be
accessed.
Notes on USB memory sticks
Only use USB memory sticks of well-
known manufacturers. The use of other
USB memory sticks may result in
malfunction of the system.
!"In rare cases it is possible that an USB
memory stick is not recognized by the
system or may cause a malfunction. This is
not a fault. Some USB memory sticks do not
comply with the USB specifications.
Due to the constant changes of USB
products in the market and their
respective software, it can be possible
that some of the USB memory sticks
are not compatible with the system.
Files that are not a standard MP3 or
WMA file may not be playable.
Encrypted USB memory sticks can not
be recognized by the system.
Depending on the state of the USB
memory stick, it may not be recognized
by the system upon connection.
USB memory sticks whose Byte/Sector
is not 512Byte or 2048Byte is not
supported.
Some USB memory sticks may not
operate in the vehicle due to
compatibility issues. Please check that
it is compatible with the system in the
vehicle before usage.
Permissible file systems
The following file systems are permitted:
FAT12
FAT16
FAT32
File names and folder names
When storing audio files on the USB stick,
you can organize the files into folders.
Names must be assigned for the files as
well as for the folders.
The Driver Information System uses these
names for the corresponding display during
playback.
Empty folders or folders containing data
other than audio files in the supported
playback formats are not displayed by the
system.
!"The Driver Information System does not
support ID3 tags.
124
AUX mode
Signal sources
Please note the following when assigning
file names:
File names must contain at least one
character. They should not contain
more than one hundred characters as
the system cannot display names
exceeding one hundred characters.
File names must have the following
extensions:
MP3 files: mp3
WMA files: wma
A period must appear between the file
name and the extension.
Example of a correct MP3 file name:
Track 1.mp3
The system will not recognize the audio
files if there is no period between the file
name and the extension or if the extension
is missing.
Supported playback formats
!"Audio files with Digital Rights Management
(DRM) are not supported.
The Driver Information System supports
the playback of audio files in the following
formats:
MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
!"In everyday speech, this format has been
replaced by the designation "MP3".
WMA
Supported bit and sampling rates
MP3 files:
Fixed and variable bit rates from
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling rates up to 48 kHz
WMA files:
Fixed and variable bit rates from
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling rates up to 48 kHz
!"Only use audio files with a bit rate of
128 kbps or higher and with a sampling rate
of 44.1 kHz or higher. Lower rates may
result in audibly impaired quality. This is
particularly true if the surround function is
activated.
Notes on AUX signal sources
!"It is possible that noise is heard during
playback when using an AUX signal source.
This is not a malfunction but system-related.
We recommend using the line-out of the
AUX signal source instead of the power
outlet (headphone or loudspeaker).
If the sound is distorted and no line-out is
available, reduce the volume level on the
AUX signal source itself.
125
AUX mode
Signal sources
Connecting signal sources
General information
If you connect an iPod®, you cannot
connect any other signal sources.
If you connect a USB memory stick and/
or AUX signal source, you cannot
connect an iPod®.
Connecting sockets
A USB socket (labeled with "USB") and a
3.5 mm (0.14") jack socket (labeld with
"AUX") are provided for connecting signal
sources.
!3,5 mm (0.14") jack socket
"USB socket
!"Connecting an iPod® uses both sockets at
the same time.
Notes on connecting an USB memory
stick
!"The system supports USB memory sticks
containing audio files. Any other USB
devices or anything else than music
playback is not supported.
Please pay attention to the following when
connecting an USB memory stick.
WARNING
If you connect and disconnect signal
sources when driving, you may be
distracted from the traffic situation, thus
increasing the accident hazard.
Only connect and disconnect signal sources
when the vehicle is stationary.
CAUTION
Please be careful that the USB socket is not
touched physically by any object. The
system may be damaged.
CAUTION
Any other USB devices such as hard discs
or other digital equipment may damage the
system as a result of excessive power
consumption.
When connecting and disconnecting a USB
memory stick many times in a short time, the
system may be damaged.
(continued)
126
AUX mode
Signal sources
When connecting or disconnecting the
USB memory stick, please be careful of
the static electricity.
Noise may occur when connecting an
USB memory stick.
The time required to analyze a
connected USB memory stick may vary
depending on the stick, stick capacity,
or the file structure of the stick. This
does not mean that the system is
malfunctioning, so please wait.
The system’s USB support shall not be
used for anything else then music
playback.
A USB hub or extension cable may
prevent the system from properly
analyzing the USB memory stick.
Please connect the USB memory stick
directly to system.
High capacity USB memory sticks may
be divided into more than one logical
drives. In this case, only the content of
the top logical drive is analyzed.
Therefore, please place the files to be
played in the top logical drive of the
USB memory stick.
Some USB memory sticks use a
separate application to store files into
the stick. This is treated in the same
way as the previous case.
Connection of MP3 player, mobile
phone, digital camera, or any other
devices that can be connected to a USB
port that are not recognized as
Removable Disk may not operate
properly.
Any other USB memory stick than the
standard Metal Cover Type is not
guaranteed to operate properly.
Operation of HDD type, CF, and SD
Memory is not guaranteed.
USB memory sticks acting as an
adapter such as for SD type and CF
type may not be recognized by the
system.
CAUTION
(continued)
Using the system’s USB interface to charge,
heat or connect any other USB devices
except of USB memory sticks my cause
decrease the system performance or
damage to the system.
When the USB memory stick is connected
to the system when starting the vehicle, the
USB memory stick may be damaged.
USB memory sticks should be disconnected
to the system when starting the vehicle.
127
AUX mode
Signal sources
USB memories whose connector part
causes connection failure due to USB
HDD or physical design of the device
connector are not guaranteed to work.
(e.g. i-stick type).
Notes on connecting an iPod®
Please pay attention to the following when
connecting an iPod®:
To connect an iPod® you will need an
appropriate connecting cable available
as original accessory at your Hyundai
dealer. Connector cable for PC
provided by Apple or other
manufacturers may not operate
properly and may cause malfunction.
The connecting cable available as
original accessory at your Hyundai
dealer simultaneously occupies the
USB socket and the AUX socket.
When connecting the iPod® cable, push
the cable connector fully so that the
signal is not disrupted.
Connection of the iPod® connection
cable without the iPod® connected at
the other end will still trigger the system
to change to AUX mode. In such case,
noise may occur due to an open end
connection. Please disconnect and
store the iPod® connector cable in a
safe place when iPod® is not in use.
If the Hyundai logo persists on the
iPod® display when disconnecting the
iPod® from the system, please upgrade
to the latest iPod® firmware.
Notes on connecting an AUX signal
source
You can connect an audio or video
signal source to the AUX socket using a
commercially available cable with a 3.5
mm (0.14") jack.
AUX operates properly only when the
external audio or video signal source
connected is operational.
Connection of the AUX connection
cable without the AUX signal source
connected at the other end will still
trigger the system to change to AUX
mode. In such case, noise may occur
due to an open end connection. Please
disconnect and store the AUX
connection cable in a safe place when
the AUX signal source is not in use.
When the power of the AUX signal
source is connected to the vehicle's
power jack, noise may occur on the
display with some devices. In this case,
disconnect from the power jack and use
the internal power source of the device.
128
AUX mode
Signal sources
After connecting an iPod® or an USB
memory stick
If Phone, Info or Navigation mode is
displayed before connecting the signal
source, the display does not switch to AUX
mode automatically.
But AUX is automatically the active audio
source and playback of the respective
signal source starts if it contains playable
files.
If Disc, FM/AM or XM® Satellite Radio
mode is displayed before connecting the
signal source, the display switches
automatically to AUX mode.
AUX is automatically the active audio
source and playback of the respective
signal source starts if it contains playable
files.
After connecting an AUX audio signal
source
If Phone, Info or Navigation mode is
displayed before connecting an AUX audio
signal source, the display does not switch
to AUX mode automatically.
But AUX is automatically the active audio
source and playback starts as soon as the
signal source transmits an audio signal.
If Disc, FM/AM or XM® Satellite Radio
mode is displayed before connecting the
AUX audio signal source, the display
switches automatically to AUX mode.
AUX is automatically the active audio
source and playback starts as soon as the
signal source transmits an audio signal.
After connecting an AUX video signal
source
Independent of the displayed mode before
connecting an AUX video signal source,
the display switches automatically to AUX
mode as soon as the signal source
transmits a video signal.
AUX is automatically the active audio
source, as soon as an AUX video signal
source is connected. It does not matter
whether the signal source transmits an
audio signal or not.
129
AUX mode
General operation
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Switching to AUX mode and
opening the AUX main menu
Option 1
Connect a signal source to the system,
see the section "Signal sources" on
page 123.
The AUX main menu appears.
!"This option only works if you are connecting
an iPod® or USB memory stick as the signal
source.
Option 2
Press the 2 button.
Either the AUX or the Disc main menu
appears.
If the Disc main menu appears:
Press the 2 button again.
The AUX main menu appears.
or
Press the 8 button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the AUX main
menu appears.
!"If Navigation, Info or Phone is the active
mode, switching to AUX mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the 2 button on the control
panel.
After the AUX main menu appears, you
will hear or see the last active signal
source if the following conditions are
met:
The signal source is still connected.
The signal source contains playable
files.
Playback has been started on the
signal source itself (AUX signal
source only).
Sample illustration of the AUX main
menu
The illustration shows the AUX main menu
during USB playback
!AUX main menu with the available
signal sources
"AUX content area
130
AUX mode
General operation
Selecting a signal source
!"You can only select a signal source if both
signal sources, USB memory stick and AUX
signal source, are connected at the same
time.
If an iPod® is connected you can not
connect an other signal source. In this case,
selecting a signal source is not possible.
Select the desired signal source in the
AUX main menu.
The system will switch to the selected
signal source.
131
AUX mode
iPod playback
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
!"Accessing iPod® main/submenu items and
tracks can be delayed depending on file
names and sizes.
Starting playback
!"The iPod® searching process can be
different depending on iPod® models.
The actual order of playback of iPod®
content on the system may be different from
actual iPod®.
!"When iPod® itself shuts down due to an
internal failure, please use iPod® after
making a reset (refer to iPod® operation
manual).
Open the AUX main menu and, if
necessary, select the iPod® as the
signal source in the AUX main menu,
see page 130.
or
Connect an iPod®, see the section
"Connecting signal sources" on
page 125.
In both cases, playback of the currently
active track in the iPod® will be
continued.
!"The position of the active track in the iPod®
structure is unknown to the system after the
iPod® has been just connected or after the
system was switched off and on with iPod®
still connected.
Due to the unknown position, the following
points are valid:
In the Options menu, the menu item
Now Playing has no function.
The system will display the iPod® menu
in the content area, instead of the track
list with the track currently playing as
described below.
The top category of the track currently
playing will not be shown in the lower
statusline as described below.
If you navigate through the iPod® menu,
the track currently playing will not be
marked with the play icon % as
described below.
As soon as you select another track, the
position of that track in the iPod® structure is
known to the system and the points
described above are no longer valid.
AUX main menu during iPod®
playback
!Mode display
"AUX main menu with list of signal
sources
#AUX icon
$Track currently playing
%Content area with track list
&Top category of the track currently
playing
'Play icon % for the track currently
playing
132
AUX mode
iPod playback
iPod® menu
!"The iPod® menu is nearly the same as the
"MUSIC" menu on the iPod® itself. The
Driver Information System cannot access
any of the other iPod® menus.
Opening the iPod® menu
To activate the content area: Push
%&;the controller $ until the content
area is active.
You can tell the active content area by
the blue frame around it.
!Blue frame
"Content area
Press the . button repeatedly until
the iPod® menu appears.
!"The iPod® searching process can be
different depending on iPod® models.
The iPod® menu has eight main menu
items in total, each of which contains at
least one submenu item, see the
following list.
!iPod® menu
!"The contents of the submenu items
"List of..." are depending on the connected
iPod®.
Main menu item Submenu items
Playlists > List of Playlists
> List of Tracks
Artists > List of Artists
> List of Albums
> List of Tracks
Albums > List of Albums
> List of Tracks
Songs > List of Tracks
Podcasts > List of Podcasts
Genres > List of Genres
> List of Artists
> List of Albums
> List of Tracks
Composers > List of Composers
> List of Albums
> List of Tracks
Audiobooks > List of Audiobooks
133
AUX mode
iPod playback
Navigating within the iPod® menu
!"Navigating within the iPod® menu can be
delayed depending on file names and sizes.
Navigating forwards
Select a menu item in the iPod® menu.
If the selected item is the last submenu
item, the playable track list will be
displayed.
Selecting a list item automatically
results in the corresponding track being
played.
Navigating backwards
Press the . button.
Skipping directly to the track currently
playing
To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, push & the controller $.
!Options menu
Skipping to the track: In the Options
menu, select the menu item Now
Playing.
Abbreviated menu items in the iPod®
menu
Menu items in the iPod® menu may be
displayed in abbreviated form. This is
indicated by the three dots "…" at the end
of a menu item. If this happens, you can call
up a complete display.
!Abreaviated menu entry
Calling up a complete display
To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, highlight the abbreviated
menu item and push & the
controller $.
134
AUX mode
iPod playback
!Options menu
To call up the display: In the Options
menu, select the menu item Details.
The complete display appears.
To close the display: Press the
controller $.
Pausing or resuming playback
!Play icon %
"Track currently playing (highlighted)
Option 1
Pausing playback
In the iPod® menu, highlight the track
currently playing and press the
controller $.
The play icon % will change to the
pause icon &.
Resuming playback
In the iPod® menu, highlight the track
currently playing once again and press
the controller $.
Playback will be resumed and the
pause icon & will change to the play
icon %.
Option 2
Pausing playback
To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, push & the controller $.
!Options menu
135
AUX mode
iPod playback
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Pause.
Playback will be paused and the
Options menu will be closed
automatically.
Resuming playback
To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, push & the controller $.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Play.
Playback will be resumed and the
Options menu will be closed
automatically.
Selecting a track
Selecting a track in the iPod® menu
Navigate through the iPod® menu and
select the desired track.
!"Refer to the section "Navigating within the
iPod® menu" on page 133 to find out how to
navigate through the iPod® menu.
Skipping tracks forward/back
!"'Skip track forward' skips to the next track.
'Skip track back' skips to the beginning
of the current track, if the track has been
playing for more than 3 seconds. If the track
has been playing for less than 3 seconds, it
will skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
Using the steering wheel
Briefly press the 4 or 5 button on
the steering wheel.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the button pressed.
Using the central control panel
To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push & the controller $.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Next Track or Prev. Track.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the selected menu
item.
136
AUX mode
iPod playback
Fast forwarding/reversing
On the central control panel
To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push & the controller $.
!Options menu
To start forwarding: In the Options
menu, select the menu item FF and
press and hold the controller $.
or
To start reversing: In the Options
menu, select the menu item REW and
press and hold the controller $.
To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the controller $.
On the steering wheel
To start forwarding: Press and hold
the 5 button.
or
To start reversing: Press and hold
the 4 button.
To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the 5 or 4 button.
Repeating tracks
!"This function will keep repeating a track until
it is cancelled.
To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, highlight the desired track
and push & the controller $.
!Status display
"Options menu
To switch the repeat function on/off:
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Repeat Track.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display ! changes accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
137
AUX mode
iPod playback
When the function is switched on, the
icon additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
!"The function switches off automatically
when you:
select another track in the iPod® menu,
switch to a different audio signal source,
for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Audio settings
Please see the section "Audio settings" on
page 34 for a description of the audio
settings.
138
AUX mode
USB playback
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
!"Accessing folders and tracks or scrolling
through lists can be delayed depending on
file names and sizes.
Starting playback
Connect a USB stick, see the section
"Connecting signal sources" on
page 125.
or
Open the AUX main menu and, if
necessary, select the USB stick as the
signal source in the AUX main menu,
see page 130.
AUX main menu during USB
playback
!Mode display
"AUX main menu with list of signal
sources
#Aux icon
$Track currently playing
%AUX content area with track/folder list
&Name of the currently active folder
'Play icon % for the track currently
playing
Displaying the track and folder names
The system uses the names assigned
during storage of the audio files on the USB
memory stick for the track/folder names
displayed in the AUX content area %. Any
ID3 tags in the audio files will be ignored.
If a track or folder name is too long, the
system will display it in abbreviated form.
This is indicated by the three dots "…" at
the end of the name. If this happens, you
can call up a complete name display.
!Abreviated track name
139
AUX mode
USB playback
Calling up a complete name display
To open the Options menu: Highlight
the corresponding track and push & the
controller $.
!Options menu
To call up a track name display: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Details.
The complete track name display
appears.
To close the display: Press the
controller $.
Selecting folders and tracks
!"Folders can only be selected if the audio
files were organized into folders when they
were stored on the USB memory stick.
!Menu item for the folder change
function
"Folder
#Play icon % for track currently playing
$Track
%Highlighted track
To switch to the next folder level up:
Select the menu item !.
The display will change accordingly.
To open a folder: Select the desired
folder.
You will see the tracks stored in this
folder.
140
AUX mode
USB playback
To play a track: Select the desired
track.
Skipping tracks forward/back
!"'Skip track forward' skips to the next track.
'Skip track back' skips to the beginning
of the current track, if the track has been
playing for more than 10 seconds. If the
track has been playing for less than
10 seconds, it will skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
Briefly press the 4 or 5 button on
the steering wheel.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the button pressed.
Fast forwarding/reversing
On the central control panel
To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push & the controller $.
!Options menu
To start forwarding: In the Options
menu, select the menu item FF and
press and hold the controller $.
or
To start reversing: In the Options
menu, select the menu item REW and
press and hold the controller $.
To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the controller $.
On the steering wheel
To start forwarding: Press and hold
the 5 button.
or
To start reversing: Press and hold
the 4 button.
To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the 5 or 4 button.
Repeating tracks or folders
!"This function will keep repeating a track or
folder until it is cancelled. Repetition of
folders is only possible if the tracks are
organized into folders. Tracks in subfolders
within the folder to be repeated will be
ignored.
Highlight the desired track or folder.
141
AUX mode
USB playback
!Folder
"Highlighted track
#Track
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
!Status display
"Options menu
To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Repeat Track or Repeat Folder.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display ! changes accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
When the function is switched on, the
icon (repeat track) or
(repeat folder) additionally appears on
the right in the top status line.
!"The repeat track function switches off
automatically when you select another
track.
The repeat folder function switches off
automatically when you select a track in
another folder.
Both functions are switching off
automatically when you:
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Random play
Switching random play of all tracks on/
off
!"Random play of all tracks plays all tracks on
the USB memory stick in random order.
Highlight the track currently playing.
!Play icon % for track currently playing
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
142
AUX mode
USB playback
!Status display
"Options menu
To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Random Disc.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display ! accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
When the function is switched on, the
icon additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
!"The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Switching random play within a specific
folder on/off
!"Random play within a specific folder plays
all tracks in a specific folder in random
order. Tracks in subfolders within the
specific folder will be ignored.
Highlight the desired folder.
!Highlighted folder
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
!Status display
"Options menu
To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Random Folder.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display ! changes accordingly.
Display # = function switched off
Display $ = function switched on
143
AUX mode
USB playback
When the function is switched on, the icon
additionally appears on the right in
the top status line.
!"The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Scan function
!"This function plays about 10 seconds of
each track on the USB memory stick and
then skips to the next track.
Highlight the track from which you want
the function to start.
!Highlighted track
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
!Options menu
To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Scan.
When the function is switched on, the
icon additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
!"The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
switch to a different audio signal source,
for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
It also switches off automatically when it
reaches the track where it started.
Audio settings
Please see the section "Audio settings"
on page 34 for a description of the audio
settings.
144
AUX mode
AUX playback
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Automatic picture switch-off
!"Switching the gear is described in detail in
the vehicle’s operation manual. Please pay
attention to the corresponding descriptions
and safety instructions in the vehicle’s
operation manual.
In the interest of safety, AUX video
playback is only possible if the gear stick is
in position P.
Else you will see a corresponding message
in the display.
The system switches the picture back on as
soon as the gear stick is in position P.
The AUX playback sound is not affected by
the switch-off.
Starting playback
!"Before starting playback, make sure that the
correct video standard is set, see the
section "AUX video standard" on page 147.
Connect an AUX signal source, see the
section "Connecting signal sources" on
page 125.
Start playback on the AUX signal
source.
Open the AUX main menu and, if
necessary, select the AUX signal
source as the signal source in the AUX
main menu, see page 129.
Depending on the AUX signal source, you
will see one of the following full-screen
displays.
Audio signal source (AUX audio source
only):
Video signal source:
145
AUX mode
AUX playback
Opening/closing the AUX main
menu during playback
Opening the AUX main menu and
closing the AUX full-screen display
Press the . button.
The AUX main menu appears.
!AUX main menu
"Menu item AUX
Closing the AUX main menu and
opening the AUX full-screen display
Press the 2 button.
or
In the AUX main menu, select the menu
item AUX.
The AUX full-screen display appears.
Audio settings
Please see the section "Audio settings" on
page 34 for a description of the audio
settings.
Video settings
Opening the Video Settings menu
During AUX video playback, press and
hold the . button until the AUX main
menu appears.
In the AUX main menu, select the menu
item Settings.
A selection menu appears.
146
AUX mode
AUX playback
!Selection menu
In the selection menu, select the menu
item Video.
The Video Settings menu appears.
!Video Settings menu
The Video Settings menu includes the
following functions:
Aspect ratio, see page 146
Brightness, color and contrast, see
page 147
AUX video standard, see page 147
Video reset, see page 148
Closing the Video Settings menu
Push % the controller $ once.
or
Briefly press the . button.
Aspect ratio
Open the Video Settings menu, see
section "Opening the Video Settings
menu" on page 145.
!Video Settings menu
To open the Aspect Ratio menu: In
the Video Settings menu, select the
menu item Aspect Ratio.
The Aspect Ratio menu appears.
!Icon " for currently active setting
147
AUX mode
AUX playback
To set the aspect ratio: Select the
desired setting.
Brightness, color and contrast
Open the Video Settings menu, see
section "Opening the Video Settings
menu" on page 145.
!Video Settings menu
To open the desired menu: In the
Video Settings menu, select either the
menu item Brightness, Color or
Contrast.
The corresponding menu appears.
The illustration shows the brightness setting
!Scale for the brightness setting
"Indicator
The position of the indicator ")on the
scale ! shows the current setting.
Turn +, the controller $ until the
desired setting is reached.
The system saves this setting
automatically.
To close the menu: Press the
controller $.
or
Briefly press the . button.
AUX video standard
!"This function lets you adapt the AUX video
input of the system to the video standard of
the AUX video signal source. The video
standards NTSC and PAL are available.
Open the Video Settings menu, see
section "Opening the Video Settings
menu" on page 145.
!Video Settings menu
To open the AUX Video Standard
menu: In the Video Settings menu,
select the menu item Video Standard.
The corresponding menu appears.
148
AUX mode
AUX playback
!Icon " for currently active setting
To set the video standard: Select the
desired setting.
Video reset
You can use the video reset function to
reset the following settings to their factory
settings:
Aspect ratio
Brightness
Color
Contrast
AUX video standard
Open the Video Settings menu, see
section "Opening the Video Settings
menu" on page 145.
!Video Settings menu
In the Video Settings menu, select the
menu item Reset Video Settings.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to reset the video settings.
Select Yes or No.
The system will or will not reset the
video settings, depending on the
answer you select.
149
Phone
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Phone main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone 153
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call. . . . . . 164
Functions during a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
150
Phone
General information
Safety instructions
When using the phone in the vehicle, the
driver must observe all the laws and
regulations of the relevant country.
If operation of phones during driving is
legal, only do so when the traffic conditions
permit this. Otherwise, your attention may
be distracted from the road traffic, resulting
in an accident.
The Driver Information System features an
integrated hands-free unit. You can use
this unit in combination with a mobile phone
connected with the system. For your own
safety, make all calls when driving using
the hands-free unit. When you use the
hands-free unit, concentrate on your
driving, close all windows and avoid
background noise.
If you do not wish to use the hands-free
unit, stop or park your car when using the
phone. Do not stop and park in areas where
this is not permitted.
General information
Basic technical prerequisites for mobile
phones
If you use a mobile phone with the system,
the system will also act, among other
things, as a hands-free unit.
To use a mobile phone with the system,
it must be equipped with the following
technology: Bluetooth® wireless
technology with HFP (hands-free profile).
!"Bluetooth® wireless technology is a
technology for wireless data communication
over short distances of up to approx.
10 metres. The data exchange itself is
controlled using profiles. The hands-free
profiles enable the Driver Information
System to be used as a hands-free unit.
To be able to use a mobile phone with
the system, the mobile phone must be
connected with the system using the above
mentioned technology. Please see the
section "Pairing/connecting/disconnecting
a mobile phone" on page 153 for a detailed
description of how to connect the mobile
phone with the system.
!"The system does not support all mobile
phones equipped with Bluetooth®
wireless technology.
WARNING
If you use the phone functions when driving,
you may be distracted from the traffic
situation, thus increasing the accident
hazard.
Only use the phone functions when the
vehicle is stationary.
151
Phone
General information
Interruptions to the connection while
driving
Interruptions to the connection may occur
if:
there is inadequate network coverage,
you are switching from one transmitting/
receiving station (cell) to another and
there is no voice channel available in
this cell.
Displaying phone numbers and names
The Driver Information System can display
the phone number and name of the caller
when there is a call incoming, for example,
but also in other menus and displays.
For phone numbers to be displayed, the
caller must transmit their phone number.
This also applies to the name display. The
following must additionally be stored in the
phonebook for this:
the phone number of the caller,
the name.
!"The phone number must be stored exactly
as the caller transmits it.
Functional restrictions
Under the following circumstances, the
phone functions may not or may not yet be
useable:
If it is not yet logged into a network.
If the mobile phone is not connected
with the Driver Information System.
During a phone call
During a phone call, the sound of the active
audio or video source is muted.
152
Phone
Phone main menu
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
The following functions are available in the
Phone main menu:
Calling up the list of missed calls, see
the section "Calling up the call list" on
page 166.
Calling up the list of received calls, see
the section "Calling up the call list" on
page 166.
Calling up the list of dialed numbers,
see the section "Calling up the call list"
on page 166.
Calling up the phonebook, see the
section "Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
Calling up the menu for entering a
phone number, see the section
"Entering a phone number" on
page 164.
Calling up the device list for pairing or
connecting a mobile phone, see the
section "Pairing a mobile phone" on
page 153 or the section "Connecting a
mobile phone" on page 156.
Calling up phone settings, see the
section "Switching automatic
connection function on/off" on
page 156.
Opening the Phone main menu
Using the control panel
Press the 1 button.
Either the Phone main menu or the Info
main menu appears.
If the Info main menu appears:
Press the 1 button once more.
The Phone main menu appears,
see illustration below.
Using the steering wheel
Press the : button.
The Phone main menu appears.
153
Phone
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
General
Before you can use a mobile phone with the
Driver Information System, it must be
paired and connected with the system via
Bluetooth®.
!"Please refer to the section "Basic technical
prerequisites for mobile phones" on
page 150.
A precondition for pairing and connecting is
that Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone.
Activating Bluetooth® on the mobile
phone
Proceed as described in the operating
guide for your mobile phone.
Pairing a mobile phone
!"Please refer also to the section "Basic
technical prerequisites for mobile phones"
on page 150.
You can pair a maximum of 8 mobile phones
with the system.
Open the Phone main menu, see the
section "Opening the Phone main
menu" on page 152.
!Phone main menu
In the Phone main menu, select the
menu item Connect Phone.
The device list appears.
!Device list
In the device list, select the menu item
Pair Phone.
If there are 8 mobile phones already
paired with the system, you will see an
appropriate message.
154
Phone
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
You must delete at least one mobile
phone pairing in order to be able to pair
a new mobile phone with the system.
To close the message: Press the
controller $.
To delete a mobile phone pairing:
See the section "Deleting a pairing"
on page 161.
If there are fewer than 8 mobile phones
paired with the system, you will see a
message prompting you to pair the
mobile phone.
Pairing includes two steps: the mobile
phone's search for the Driver
Information System and the
subsequent entry of the passkey on
the mobile phone.
The passkey is 1234. There are 2
minutes of time available for entering
the passkey.
!Bluetooth® name of the Driver
Information System
"Passkey
#Remaining time for entry of the passkey
Start the search for the Driver
Information System on the mobile
phone. Proceed as described in the
operating guide for your mobile phone.
The Bluetooth® name of the Driver
Information System is GENESIS, it is
displayed under this name on the
mobile phone.
155
Phone
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Start pairing on the mobile phone.
When the mobile phone asks for the
passkey, enter the passkey 1234 in the
mobile phone.
The system will abort entry of the
passkey if the 2 minutes of time are
running out without the passkey being
entered.
If the passkey has been correctly
entered, the mobile phone is paired with
the system and automatically
connected with the system. You will see
an appropriate status display that
automatically closes after a short time.
!"Some mobile phones make a request at the
end of the pairing, if the connection should
be made automatically or requested each
time.
If the passkey has not been correctly
entered, you will see a prompt.
To terminate passkey entry: Select
No.
To enter the passkey again:
Select Yes and enter the passkey
once more.
If connection is not possible despite the
passkey having been entered correctly,
you will see an appropriate message.
This message will close automatically
and the system will attempt to connect
with the last mobile phone that was
connected.
If you wish to make another connection
attempt with the newly paired mobile
phone, you must do so manually, see the
section "Connecting manually" on
page 157.
156
Phone
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Connecting a mobile phone
!"Please refer also to the section "Basic
technical prerequisites for mobile phones"
on page 150.
The following connection options are
available:
Connecting automatically, see
page 156
Connecting manually, see page 157
Connecting automatically
After the system is switched on, it
automatically attempts to reconnect with
the last mobile phone connected. The
following conditions must be met for this:
The mobile phone was not manually
disconnected from the system by the
user.
The mobile phone is switched on and is
within the reception range of the
system.
The mobile phone is still paired with the
system.
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone.
Automatic connection function of the
system is switched on, see the section
"Switching automatic connection
function on/off" on page 156.
If no connection is possible, the system will
attempt a connection with another mobile
phone already previously paired with the
system.
The above conditions must be met for this.
Switching automatic connection
function on/off
Open the Phone main menu, see the
section "Opening the Phone main
menu" on page 152.
!Phone main menu
In the Phone main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
!Status display
"Menu item Bluetooth Autoconnect
#Icon for the connection status
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Bluetooth Autoconnect.
The automatic connection function will
be activated or deactivated, depending
on the previous status. The status
display ! changes accordingly.
157
Phone
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Display # = function deactivated
Display $ = function activated
The connection status is displayed with
the icon # in the bottom status line.
Icon = No mobile phone is
connected
Icon = A mobile phone is
connected
Connecting manually
!"Manual connection of a mobile phone
automatically causes disconnection of any
mobile phone already connected.
Open the Phone main menu, see the
section "Opening the Phone main
menu" on page 152.
!Phone main menu
In the Phone main menu, select the
menu item Connect Phone.
The device list appears.
!"The list will be empty if there have not yet
been any mobile phones paired with the
system.
The icons before the list entries indicate
the status of the respective mobile
phone.
!Icon = Mobile phone is paired with
the system and currently connected
"Icon = Mobile phone is paired with
the system, but not currently connected
#Phone name
$Device list
%Icon for the connection status
!"You can change the phone name, see the
section "Renaming a phone" on page 160.
If the desired mobile phone is not in
the list: Pair the mobile phone with the
system, see the section "Pairing a
mobile phone" on page 153.
158
Phone
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
If the desired mobile phone is in the
list: Select the mobile phone.
The system will start the process of
connecting with the mobile phone.
If connection is successful, the icon in
the device list will change.
If connection is not successful, you will
see an appropriate message that
disappears after a short time.
The connection status is displayed with
an icon in the bottom status line.
Icon = No mobile phone is
connected
Icon = A mobile phone is
connected
Terminating a connection
!"If you terminate a connection, the system is
no longer able to connect that phone
automatically as described in the section
"Connecting automatically" on page 156.
At first, you must connect the phone
manually again, see section "Connecting
manually" on page 157.
Open the Phone main menu, see the
section "Opening the Phone main
menu" on page 152.
!Phone main menu
In the Phone main menu, select the
menu item Connect Phone.
The device list appears.
!Device list
Select the desired mobile phone in the
device list.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to terminate the connection.
159
Phone
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Select Yes.
The connection will be terminated.
Dropped connection
!"The connection between the mobile phone
and the system can drop, for example if the
mobile phone is switched off or if it is no
longer within the reception range of the
system.
If the connection between the mobile
phone and the system drops, you will see
an appropriate message.
The system will automatically attempt to re-
establish the connection, provided that the
automatic connection function is still
switched on, see section "Switching
automatic connection function on/off" on
page 156.
160
Phone
Options
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
You can open the Options menu for each
mobile phone shown in the device list.
The Options menu includes the following
functions:
Renaming a phone, see page 160
Deleting a pairing, see page 161
Deleting all pairings, see page 162
Calling up the device list
Open the Phone main menu, see the
section "Opening the Phone main
menu" on page 152.
In the Phone main menu, select the
menu item Connect Phone.
The device list appears.
Renaming a phone
!"The phone names shown in the device list
generally originate from the mobile phones
themselves. You can, however, also change
the names.
Call up the device list, see the section
"Calling up the device list" on page 160.
!Device list
Highlight the desired mobile phone in
the device list !.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Rename Phone.
The input menu appears.
161
Phone
Options
!Characters already entered
"Currently highlighted character
#Predictive speller
$Complete entry
%Delete a complete entry
&Delete individual characters
'Enter space
(Switch character set
*Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller #
The input menu has two user-control areas:
The area with the predictive speller # and
the area with the menu items $ and %.
To move from one area to another:
Push '( the controller $.
To enter a character: In the predictive
speller, highlight a character by
turning +, the controller $;and press
the controller $.
The character is entered and appears in
the display ! of characters already
entered.
To switch character set: In the
predictive speller, select one of the
menu items (.
The corresponding character set
appears in the predictive speller.
To delete individual characters: In
the predictive speller, select the menu
item &.
The last character entered is deleted.
To delete a complete entry: From the
predictive speller, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
Delete All.
The complete entry is deleted.
To make a new entry: Push ' the
controller $ to move back to the
predictive speller and enter characters
as described previously.
To complete entry: From the
predictive speller, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
OK.
Deleting a pairing
Call up the device list, see the section
"Calling up the device list" on page 160.
162
Phone
Options
!Device list
Highlight the desired mobile phone in
the device list.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete Pairing.
!"The menu item Delete Pairing cannot be
selected if the highlighted mobile phone is
connected with the system.
The pairing is now deleted and the
mobile phone is also no longer
connected with the system.
Before you can reconnect the mobile
phone with the system you must pair it
with the system again, see the section
"Pairing a mobile phone" on page 153.
After the pairing is deleted, the system
will automatically search for another
mobile phone already paired with the
system. If it finds one, this mobile phone
will be automatically connected with the
system.
Deleting all pairings
Call up the device list, see the section
"Calling up the device list" on page 160.
!Device list
In the device list, push & the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
163
Phone
Options
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All Pairings.
!"The menu item Delete All Pairings cannot
be selected if the device list does not
contain any mobile phones.
All mobile phone pairings are deleted,
except for the connected mobile phone.
164
Phone
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Initiating an outgoing call
The following options for initiating an
outgoing call are available:
Entering a phone number, see
page 164
Using call lists, see page 165
Using redial, see page 168
Using the phonebook, see the section
"Phonebook" on page 175
Entering a phone number
Open the Phone main menu, see the
section "Opening the Phone main
menu" on page 152.
In the Phone main menu, select the
menu item Dial Number.
The input menu appears.
!Input field
"Predictive speller
#Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller "
$Initiate a call
%Store number in the phonebook
&Delete individual digits
'Delete a complete entry
(Currently highlighted character
!"At the beginning, the input field ! is empty.
The input menu has two user-control areas:
The area with the predictive speller " and
the area with the menu items $, % and
'.
To move from one area to another:
Push '( the controller $.
To enter a number: In the predictive
speller, highlight a digit by turning +,
the controller $ and press the
controller $.
The digit is entered and appears in
input field !.
To delete individual digits: In the
predictive speller, select the menu item
&.
The last entered digit is deleted.
To delete a complete entry: From the
predictive speller, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
Delete All.
The complete entry is deleted.
165
Phone
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call
To make a new entry: Push ' the
controller $ to move back to the
predictive speller and enter a number
as described previously.
To store an entered number in the
phonebook: From the predictive
speller, push ( the controller $ and
select the menu item SAVE.
The name input menu appears, see
section "Creating a new entry"
on page 175.
Continue as described in the
section "Creating a new entry",
see page 175.
To initiate a call to the phone number
entered: From the predictive speller,
push ( the controller $ and select the
menu item CALL.
The mobile phone initiates the call; a
corresponding message is displayed.
To cancel a call: Press the
controller $.
The call is cancelled.
If the other party answers, the call is
active and you conduct the call over the
hands-free unit. Please see the section
"Functions during a call" on page 169
for a description of the functions that
are possible during a call.
Using call lists
The Driver Information System can display
each of the following in a separate list:
Missed calls
Received calls
Dialed numbers
!"The list of received calls also contains the
rejected calls.
Each list contains a maximum of 20 entries.
You can use the entries to initiate an
outgoing call.
The call lists of the system are independent
of those of the mobile phone. Connecting
and disconnecting of mobile phones does
not influence the call lists.
The system can only log calls or dialed
numbers in its list if the mobile phone is
connected with it and if the phone functions
are being used via the system.
166
Phone
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call
Calling up the call list
Open the Phone main menu, see the
section "Opening the Phone main
menu" on page 152.
!Phone main menu
In the Phone main menu, select one of
the menu items Missed Calls,
Received Calls or Dialed Numbers.
The appropriate call list appears. The
entries in the list are sorted in
chronological order, with the most
recent at the top.
Illustration shows the list of dialed numbers
Initiating a call
Select the desired entry in the call list.
The mobile phone initiates the call. If
the other party answers, the call is
active and you conduct it over the
hands-free unit.
Please see the section "Functions
during a call" on page 169 for a
description of the functions that are
possible during a call.
Saving a list entry to the phonebook
Highlight the desired entry in the call
list.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Save to Phone Book.
!"The menu item Save to Phone Book
cannot be selected if the number is already
saved to the phonebook.
167
Phone
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call
The name input menu appears, see
section "Creating a new entry"
on page 175.
Continue as described in the section
"Creating a new entry", see page 175.
Deleting an individual list entry
Highlight the desired entry in the call
list.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really want to delete the entry.
Select Yes or No.
The entry will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
Deleting all list entries
!"This function deletes all entries in the call list
currently open.
In the call list, push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really want to delete all entries in
the call list currently open.
168
Phone
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call
Select Yes or No.
The entries will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
Using redial
!"You can use redial as a quick way of
initiating another call to the last number
dialed.
Press and hold the : button on the
steering wheel.
The system will initiate the call to the
corresponding phone number.
!"You can also use the list of dialed numbers
for the redial function, see the section
"Using call lists" on page 165.
Accepting/rejecting an incoming
call
The call screen is displayed when there is a
call incoming.
Accepting a call: Select Accept.
or
Briefly press the : button on the
steering wheel.
The call is active and you conduct it
over the hands-free unit.
Rejecting a call: Select Reject.
or
Press and hold the : button on the
steering wheel.
Please see the section "Functions during a
call" on page 169 for a description of the
functions that are possible during a call.
169
Phone
Functions during a call
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Overview
The following functions are available during
a call:
Setting the call volume, see the section
"Setting the volume" on page 33
Mute the microphone, see page 169
Switching private mode on/off, see
page 170
Holding and reactivating a call, see
page 170
Sending DTMF tones, see page 171
Ending a call, see page 171
Special functions for two calls, see
page 172
Call display
The illustration below shows the display
during a call via the mobile phone.
!Call status display
"Name and number of the other party
#Call duration
$Name of the mobile phone
%Predictive speller
&End the call
'Switch the microphone on/off
(Switch private mode on/off
*Hold or reactivate the call
The call display has three user-control
areas:
Area with the predictive speller %
Area with the menu item &
Area with the menu items ' - *
To move from one area to another:
Push '( % & the controller $.
Mute the microphone
When the microphone is muted, the other
party cannot hear you although you can still
hear them.
!Call status display
"Microphone status display
#Mute Mic menu item
170
Phone
Functions during a call
In the call display, select the menu item
Mute Mic.
Depending on the previous status, the
microphone will be muted or not. The
microphone status display will change
accordingly.
Display # = microphone not muted
Display $ = microphone muted
The call status display will likewise
change.
Switching private mode on/off
!"Private mode allows you to transfer the call
back and forth between the hands-free unit
and the mobile phone. This function is not
possible with all mobile phones. Some
mobile phones disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between the system and mobile
phone when private mode is switched on.
Private mode is automatically switched off
when you end the last active call.
When private mode is switched off you
conduct the call over the hands-free unit
(vehicle), when private mode is switched on
you conduct the call over the mobile phone.
Even when private mode is switched on,
the sound of the active audio or video
source is muted.
!Call status display
"Private mode status display
#Private Mode menu item
Before or during the call, select the
menu item Private Mode in the Phone
main menu.
or
During the call, press the 8 button
on the steering wheel.
Depending on the previous status,
private mode will be switched on or off.
The private mode status display to the
left of the menu item will change
accordingly.
Display # = private mode switched
off
Display $ = private mode switched
on
The call status display will likewise
change.
Holding and reactivating a call
!"This function is only available if it is
supported and enabled by the phone
network operator and supported by the
mobile phone.
When the call is on hold, you will not hear
the other party and they will not hear you.
171
Phone
Functions during a call
!Call status display
"Hold Call menu item
To hold a call: In the call display, select
the menu item Hold Call.
The call is on hold and the call status
display ! changes. The menu item
Hold Call changes to Activate Call.
Reactivating a call: In the call display,
select the menu item Activate Call.
The call is reactivated and the call
status display ! changes again. The
menu item Activate Call changes to
Hold Call.
Sending DTMF tones
!"DTMF tones can be sent during the call. You
can use them to control answering
machines or other devices, for example for
remote query functions.
!Display of the digits or characters
already sent
"Predictive speller
In the predictive speller ", highlight a
digit or character and press the
controller $.
The corresponding tone will be sent and
the digit or character appears in the
display !.
Ending a call
!END menu item
In the call display, select the menu item
END.
or
Press and hold the : button on the
steering wheel until the call is ended.
!"Ending the call using the steering wheel
will also work if the display is showing
something other than phone mode,
for example the map display in navigation
mode.
172
Phone
Functions during a call
Special functions for two calls
The following functions are available
provided they are supported and enabled
by the phone network operator and
supported by the mobile phone:
Calling a second party, see page 172
Accepting/rejecting a call-waiting call,
see page 172
Swapping between two calls, see
page 173
Ending calls, see page 173
Calling a second party
!Call status display
"Hold Call menu item
In the call display, select the menu item
Hold Call.
The first call is on hold and the call
status display ! changes. The menu
item Hold Call changes to Activate
Call.
To enter the phone number: Enter the
individual digits of the phone number as
described in the section "Entering a
phone number", see page 164.
To complete entry and initiate the
call: Select the menu item CALL.
The mobile phone initiates the call to
the second party; a corresponding
message is displayed.
To cancel a call: Press the
controller $.
The first call is automatically
reactivated.
If the other party answers, the second
call is active.
You now have the following options:
Swapping between two calls, see
page 173
Ending calls, see page 173
Accepting/rejecting a call-waiting call
!"This function is only available if it is
supported by the phone and the phone
service provider and if it is enabled.
If someone rings you during a call, you
will see the call waiting display.
173
Phone
Functions during a call
The following functions are available:
Accepting the call-waiting call and
holding the first call
Accepting the call-waiting call and
ending the first call
Rejecting the call-waiting call
Accepting the call-waiting call and
holding the first call
Select Hold 1st Call.
or
Briefly press the : button on the
steering wheel.
The call-waiting call is accepted and
active and the first call is on hold.
Accepting the call-waiting call and
ending the first call
Select End 1st Call.
The call-waiting call is accepted and
active and the first call is ended.
Rejecting the call-waiting call
Select Ignore.
or
Press and hold the : button on the
steering wheel.
The first call remains active.
Swapping between two calls
If you have one active call and one call on
hold, you can swap between the two calls.
!Icon for the active call
"Active party
#Party on hold
$Swap Calls menu item
%Icon for the call on hold
Select the menu item Swap Calls.
or
Briefly press the : button on the
steering wheel.
The previously active call is now on
hold and the previously call on hold is
now active. The displays " and #
change accordingly.
Ending calls
Ending both calls simultaneously
Press and hold the : button on the
steering wheel until the two calls are
ended.
!"This function is also possible if the display is
showing something other than phone mode,
for example the map display in navigation
mode.
174
Phone
Functions during a call
Ending the active call only
!"Ending the active call activates the
previously call on hold, which can then also
be ended.
!End Call menu item
In the call display, select the menu item
End Call.
175
Phone
Phonebook
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
General information
The phonebook of the Driver Information
System is independent from the
phonebook of the mobile phone. Transfer
of phonebook entries from the system to
the mobile phone or vice versa is not
possible.
The system phonebook holds a maximum
of 200 entries. Each entry can contain a
name and a phone number.
Calling up the phonebook
Open the Phone main menu, see the
section "Opening the Phone main
menu" on page 152.
In the Phone main menu, select the
menu item Phone Book.
The phonebook appears.
!Search for an entry
"Maximum number of entries
#Existing entries
$Create a new entry
The following functions are now available:
Creating a new entry, see page 175
Editing an entry, see page 177
Searching for an entry, see page 178
Displaying details on an entry, see
page 180
Initiating a call to an entry, see
page 180
Deleting an entry, see page 181
Creating a new entry
!"You can also create entries in the call lists
as new phonebook entries, see the section
"Using call lists" on page 165.
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
In the phonebook, select the menu item
New Entry.
!"The phonebook holds a maximum of 200
entries. The menu item New Entry cannot
be selected if the phonebook is full.
The input menu appears. You can now
enter the name.
176
Phone
Phonebook
!Input field
"Currently highlighted character
#Predictive speller
$Complete entry
%Delete a complete entry
&Delete individual characters
'Enter space
(Switch character set
*Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller #
!"At the beginning, the input field ! is empty.
The input menu has two user-control areas:
The area with the predictive speller # and
the area with the menu items $ and %.
To move from one area to another:
Push '( the controller $.
Entering a name
!"You can enter a maximum of 50 characters
for a name.
To enter a character: In the predictive
speller, highlight a character by
turning +, the controller $ and press
the controller $.
The character is entered and appears in
the input field !.
To switch character set: In the
predictive speller, select one of the
menu items (.
The corresponding character set
appears in the predictive speller.
To delete individual characters: In
the predictive speller, select the menu
item &.
The last character entered is deleted.
To delete a complete entry: From the
predictive speller, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
Delete All.
The complete entry is deleted.
To make a new entry: Push ' the
controller $ to move back to the
predictive speller and enter characters
as described previously.
To confirm an entry: From the
predictive speller, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
OK.
If the phonebook already contains an
entry with the name entered, you will
see an appropriate message.
177
Phone
Phonebook
To close the display: Press the
controller $.
To correct an entry: Proceed as
described above.
If the phonebook do not yet contain an
entry with the name entered, you can
now enter the phone number.
Entering a phone number
!"You can enter a maximum of 20 characters
for a phone number.
Proceed as previously when entering a
name, see page 176.
To confirm an entry: Select the menu
item OK.
The entry procedure is completed and
the entry is created.
Editing an entry
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list. You will find an operating
example for a list in the section "Lists"
on page 29 of the chapter "Functional
introduction". There you will also find
the description of how to scroll through
a list.
!Phonebook
Highlight the desired entry in the
phonebook.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Edit.
A selection list appears.
Highlight the name or phone number
and press the controller $.
The editing menu appears.
Proceed as previously when entering a
name or number, see page 176.
To complete editing: Select the menu
item OK.
!"The menu item OK can only be selected if
at least one character has been changed or
entered.
178
Phone
Phonebook
Searching for an entry
You can scroll through the phonebook or
use the search function.
Scrolling through the phonebook
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list. You will find an operating
example for a list in the section "Lists"
on page 29 of the chapter "Functional
introduction". There you will also find
the description of how to scroll through
a list.
!Phonebook
Using the search function
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
!Phonebook
In the phonebook, select the menu item
Search Entry.
!"The menu item Search Entry cannot be
selected if the phonebook does not contain
any entries.
The search menu appears.
!Input field
"Currently highlighted character
#Predictive speller
$Complete entry
%Delete a complete entry
&Delete individual characters
'Enter space
(Switch character set
*Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller #
+List of hits
!"At the beginning, the input field ! is empty.
179
Phone
Phonebook
The search menu has two user-control
areas: The area with the predictive speller
# and the area with the menu items $
and %.
To move from one area to another:
Push '( the controller $.
To enter a character: In the predictive
speller, highlight a character by
turning +, the controller $ and press
the controller $.
!"Not all of the characters displayed can be
highlighted in the predictive speller. The
characters that can be highlighted depend
on those already entered and the data for
the phonebook.
The character is entered and appears in
the input field !.
The list of hits + is adapted
accordingly each time you enter
a character. It shows the entries
matching the entered characters.
To switch character set: In the
predictive speller, select one of the
menu items (.
The corresponding character set
appears in the predictive speller.
To delete individual characters: In
the predictive speller, select the menu
item &.
The last character entered is deleted.
To delete a complete entry: From the
predictive speller, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
Delete All.
The complete entry is deleted.
To make a new entry: Push ' the
controller $ to move back to the
predictive speller and enter characters
as described previously.
To complete entry: From the
predictive speller, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
OK.
A selection list with one or more entries
containing the entered characters is
displayed.
The following functions are now available:
Editing an entry, see page 177
Displaying details on an entry, see
page 180
Initiating a call to an entry, see
page 180
Deleting an entry, see page 181
180
Phone
Phonebook
Displaying details on an entry
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list. You will find an operating
example for a list in the section "Lists"
on page 29 of the chapter "Functional
introduction". There you will also find
the description of how to scroll through
a list.
!Phonebook
In the phonebook, highlight the desired
entry.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
The details screen appears.
To close the details screen: Press the
controller $.
Initiating a call to an entry
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
Highlight the desired entry.
Press the controller $.
The system initiates the call.
181
Phone
Phonebook
Deleting an entry
You can delete all entries or just an
individual entry.
Deleting all entries
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list. You will find an operating
example for a list in the section "Lists"
on page 29 of the chapter "Functional
introduction". There you will also find
the description of how to scroll through
a list.
!Phonebook
In the phonebook, highlight any entry
you like.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all entries.
Select Yes or No.
All entries will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
Deleting an individual entry
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
Call up the phonebook, see the section
"Calling up the phonebook" on
page 175.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list.
182
Phone
Phonebook
You will find an operating example for a
list in the section "Lists" on page 29 of
the chapter "Functional introduction".
There you will also find the description
of how to scroll through a list.
!Phonebook
In the Phonebook, highlight the desired
entry.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
!Options menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the highlighted entry.
Select Yes or No.
The entry will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
183
Navigation
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Navigation main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Entering destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Functions after entering the destination. . . . . . . . . 214
Route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Functions during route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Functions independent of route guidance . . . . . . . 228
Saving/deleting destinations in the Address Book 232
Editing Address Book entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
184
Navigation
General information
Safety instructions Digital map
The data for the digital map will become
obsolete, just like conventional road maps.
Optimum route guidance is only achieved
with up-to-date map software.
Information on new map software versions
is available from your Hyundai service
center.
GPS reception
The navigation system uses the Global
Positioning System (GPS). The correct
functioning of the navigation system is
dependent on the GPS reception.
In certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, distorted or even impossible,
for example in tunnels, multi-storey car
parks or due to snow on the GPS antenna.
The system will show you whether or not
the GPS reception is sufficient, see the
section "Calling up the map display and
switching to navigation mode" on
page 187.
WARNING
Due to changes in traffic conditions, the
navigation system may guide you to
impassable route.
During driving, always pay attention to the
the traffic condition.
Operations such as adding mark points and
searching POIs may distract you from the
traffic situation, thus increasing the accident
hazard.
Perform these operations only when the
vehicle is stationary.
WARNING
If you use the navigation system, the
following factors may increase the accident
hazard:
Distraction from the traffic situation.
Failure to observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities.
Inappropriate audible driving
recommendations or route guidance
displays as a result of the real world not
matching the data on the digital map,
for example road works or modified
road routing.
Therefore, always comply with the following:
Only enter a navigation destination
when the vehicle is stationary.
Always observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities.
They always have priority over the
audible driving recommendations or
route guidance displays by the system.
185
Navigation
General information
Route guidance after vehicle
transport
After vehicle transport (e.g. by ferry, car
train or by towing), the navigation system
no longer knows the correct vehicle
position. The system therefore needs to re-
determine its position.
Positioning is performed automatically. The
actual length of time may vary from case to
case.
During positioning, route guidance is
subject to the following restrictions:
Audible driving recommendations,
route guidance displays and displayed
data do not match the actual location.
The system does not output audible
driving recommendations.
Once positioning is complete, route
guidance continues as usual with
appropriate audible driving
recommendations and route guidance
displays.
Function restrictions when driving
the vehicle
Some functions of the navigation system
are restricted or not available at all as soon
as the vehicle exceeds a certain speed.
As soon as the vehicle falls below a certain
speed, the functions are available again.
The restriction can be recognized from the
fact that certain menu items have no
function.
Menu items without function
Menu items without function are shown in
grey color, see example illustration below.
Screenshot is not the correct one.
Correct one must be requested.
!Menu items with function
"Menu item without function
!"The illustration above shows the Address
Book with its several menu categories.
The table below shows the certain menu
items and their restriction when driving the
vehicle.
Red colored menu items = Items without
function when driving the vehicle
Black colored menu items = Items with
function when driving the vehicle
186
Navigation
General information
Restricted menus while the vehicle is
driving
If one of the menus with a restriction is
open and the vehicle exceeds a certain
speed, three cases are possible:
If the menu is completely restricted
during driving:
All menu items are shown in grey color.
None of the menu items can be
selected.
If the menu is partially restricted during
driving and a restricted menu item was
highlighted before driving:
The next unrestricted menu item will be
highlighted automatically and all
restricted menu items are shown in grey
color. Only the not restricted menu
items can be selected.
If the menu is partially restricted during
driving and a not restricted menu item
was highlighted befor driving:
All restricted menu items are shown in
grey color. Only the not restricted menu
items can be selected.
!"While in a restricted menu, you can always
use the . button to go back to the next
higher menu level.
Navigation
main menu
item
Submenu or options
menu item
Destination All items except
Address Book
Address Book
All items
except
Address List
Item Address
List
Route
Overview
All items
Change Route All items
Edit Addr.
Book
All items
Settings Guidance
Volume
NAVI Information
All other items
187
Navigation
Basic functions
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Calling up the map display and
switching to navigation mode
Press the / button.
The map display showing the current
vehicle position and further information
appears.
Example screenshot, it comes from the
Korean manual.
!Currently set map orientation
"Current time
#Distance/direction indicator
$Audible driving recommendations are
deactivated
%Current vehicle position
&Voice control system is active
'Estimated time of arrival
(Display for GPS reception (blue
lettering = reception is o.k.)
Below is the provided US screenshot. It
doesn’t contain information marked
with the numbers ", #, &, and ( as
shown in the example screenshot on the
left. Doesn’t the US system show this
information?
You can switch the map orientation, see the
section "Switching the map orientation" on
page 244.
The distance/direction indicator # only
appears if a route guidance is active. You
can switch the distance/direction indicator
# between displaying the data for the
waypoint or for the main destination, see
the section "Switching the distance/
direction display" on page 223.
The display $ only appears if the audible
driving recommendations are deactivated,
see the section "Activating/deactivating
audible driving recommendations" on
page 191.
The display & only appears if the voice
control system is active.
The display ' only appears when route
guidance is active.
Position/scroll mode within the map
display
If you call up the map display as previously
described, position mode is automatically
set.
In position mode, you always see the
current vehicle position.
In scroll mode, you see a crosshairs on the
map and you can move (scroll) the map.
188
Navigation
Basic functions
Switching mode
To switch from position mode to
scroll mode: Push the controller $ in
any direction ('(%&)*).
The crosshairs appear and you can
move the map, see the section "Moving
the map/setting the map scale" on
page 190.
!Information on the crosshairs position
"Crosshairs
#Current vehicle position
$Distance and direction as the crow flies
from the vehicle position to the
crosshairs position
To switch from scroll mode to
position mode: Press the / button.
The crosshairs disappear and the map
is automatically set to the current
vehicle position.
!"If you have moved the map, you can quickly
move the map to the vehicle position using
this function.
If you press the / button while route
guidance is active, you will also hear a
current audible driving recommendation.
Options in position/scroll mode
!"Different options are available in the Options
menu depending on whether position mode
or scroll mode is set.
Opening the Options menu
In the map display, press the
controller $.
The Options menu appears. The
options available in the respective
mode are described in the following
sections.
To return to the Navigation main
menu: Briefly press the . button.
Options in position and scroll mode
The following options are available in
position and scroll modes:
Traffic information, see page 230
Switching the map orientation, see
page 244
Entering a POI destination via a vicinity
search, see page 208
Options in scroll mode only
The following options are available in scroll
mode:
Saving the crosshairs position as a
destination in the address book
category Address List, see the section
"Option 2 (only for the category Address
List)" on page 233
Setting the center point of the
crosshairs as the destination, see
the section "Conforming the
destination" on page 215
189
Navigation
Basic functions
Adding the center point of the
crosshairs as the waypoint, see
the section "Adding the destination to
an existing route as a waypoint" on
page 215
Calling up POI information and initiating
a call to a POI, see the section "POI
information" on page 229
!"POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example. This function is only available if
the center point of the crosshairs is
indicating a POI.
Options in position mode only
The following options are available in
position mode:
Suspending route guidance, see
page 222
!"This function is only available during route
guidance.
Resuming route guidance, see
page 222
!"This function is only available if route
guidance was previously interrupted.
Changing the route, see page 223
Switching the map orientation, see the
section "Switching the map orientation"
on page 244
Switching the map mode, see the
section "Switching the map mode" on
page 245
Switching the distance/direction
display, see page 223
Freeway information, see page 228
Information on the current vehicle
position
Press the / button.
You will see an information display on
the current vehicle position at the top of
the display, if the digital map contains
corresponding data.
The display disappears automatically
after a short time.
!Information display
190
Navigation
Basic functions
Moving the map/setting the map
scale
!"It is no longer possible to gradually move the
map as soon as the vehicle exceeds a
certain speed. It becomes possible to
gradually move the map again as soon as
the vehicle falls below a certain speed.
If you move the map while the vehicle is
stationary, then the rate at which the map
moves will increase the longer you press
and hold the controller $.
To activate scroll mode: Push the
controller $ in any direction
('(%&)*).
If the map was previously in position
mode, it will switch to scroll mode and
you will see a crosshairs.
!Information on the crosshairs position
"Crosshairs
#Current vehicle position
$Distance and direction as the crow flies
from the vehicle position to the
crosshairs position
%Currently set map scale
To move the map: Push and hold the
controller $ in any direction
('(%&)*).
The map moves accordingly.
To set the map scale: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired scale is
reached.
To quickly set the map to the vehicle
position: Press the / button.
The crosshairs disappear. The map is
automatically set to the current vehicle
position and is in position mode.
Audible driving recommendations
Setting the volume of the audible driving
recommendations
!"The volume can also be set during an
audible driving recommendation, see the
section "Functional introduction", section
"Setting the volume" on page 33.
Opening the Settings menu
To open the Navigation main menu:
Press and hold the . button until the
Navigation main menu appears.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
191
Navigation
Basic functions
Setting the volume
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Guidance Volume.
The volume scale appears.
Turn +, the controller $ until the
desired setting is reached.
The system saves this setting
automatically.
To close the menu: Press the .
button.
Activating/deactivating audible driving
recommendations
!"If audible driving recommendations are
deactivated, you will see the icon on the
left-hand side of the map display.
The icon will also be visible in the bottom
status line, if the status line is displayed.
To call up the map display in
position mode: Press the / button.
The map display appears.
To open the Options menu: Press the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
To activate/deactivate: In the Options
menu, select the menu item Voice Off
or Voice On.
The text of the menu item and the icon
to the left of the menu item change
accordingly, both always show the
current status.
To close the Options menu: Press
the . button.
Calling up a current audible driving
recommendation
!"If you did not understand an audible driving
recommendation, you can call up a current
driving recommendation at any time.
Press the / button.
You will hear a current audible driving
recommendation. The display will
simultaneously switch to the map
display, if it was previously showing
a different display.
192
Navigation
Navigation main menu
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Opening the Navigation main menu
From any point in navigation mode
Press and hold the . button.
From any other mode, e.g. FM mode
Press the 0 button.
From the map display
If the map is in position mode: Briefly
press the . button.
If the map is in scroll mode: Press
and hold the . button.
!Navigation main menu
"Highlighted menu item
#Submenu items of the highlighted menu
item
You can access the following menu items in
the Navigation main menu:
Destination, see the section "Entering
destinations" on page 193
Route Overview , see the section
"Displaying the calculated route again"
on page 222
!"The menu item Route Overview is only
available when route guidance is active.
Change Route, see the section
"Waypoints" on page 224
!"The menu item Change Route is only
available if a destination has been entered.
Edit Addr. Book see the section
"Editing Address Book entries" on
page 239
Settings, see the section "Settings" on
page 243
193
Navigation
Entering destinations
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
!"When entering a destination, you can only
enter the data stored in the digital map.
The following options are available for
entering a destination:
Entering a destination via the address,
see page 193
Entering a destination via the Previous
Destinations, see page 198
Entering a destination via Intersection
input, see page 198
Entering a POI destination via POI
name, see page 199
Entering a POI destination via POI
category, see page 203
Entering a POI destination via POI
phone number, see page 206
Entering a POI destination via a vicinity
search, see page 208
Entering a destination via the Address
Book, see page 210
Entering an emergency destination, see
page 211
Entering a destination via the map, see
page 212
Entering a destination via the
address
Opening the address input menu
Open the Navigation main menu, see
section "Opening the Navigation main
menu" on page 192.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
In the selection list, select the item
Address.
The address input menu appears.
!Input progress display (in the example
currently entered state/province)
"Hit list (empty if no address has been
entered)
#Input field
$Predictive speller
%Confirm entry
&Delete all characters in the input field
'Menu item for entering the state/
province
194
Navigation
Entering destinations
Now you have the following options:
Entering a state/province, see section
"Entering a state/province" on page 194
Entering a street, see section "Entering
a street" on page 195.
!"Before entering a street, make sure that the
correct state/province has been entered
before.
After entering a street, entering a city,
see section "Entering a city" on
page 196.
After entering a street or city, entering a
house number, see section "Entering a
house number" on page 197.
Entering a state/province
Open the address input menu, see
section "Opening the address input
menu" on page 193.
In the address input menu, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
State/Prov..
Now you can enter the state/province.
!Hit list
"Currently highlighted character
#Input field
$Number of hits in the hit list !
%Predictive speller
&Confirm entry
'Delete all characters in the input field
(Delete individual characters in the input
field
*Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller
Entering/deleting characters
To enter a character: In the predictive
speller %, highlight a character and
press the controller $.
The character is entered and appears in
the input field #.
!"Not all of the characters displayed can be
highlighted in the predictive speller %. The
characters that can be highlighted depend
on those already entered.
Before any character is entered, the hit list
! shows all states/provinces. Each time
you enter a character, the hit list is
narrowed down in accordance with the
characters already entered. As soon as the
entry is unambiguous, the hit list contains
just one entry. Once you reach this stage
you cannot enter any further characters,
you can only complete the entry.
To delete individual characters in the
input field #: Select the menu item
(.
The last character entered is deleted.
195
Navigation
Entering destinations
To delete all characters in the input
field #: Push ( the controller $ and
select the menu item Delete All.
All characters are deleted.
Completing entry
Option 1: Keep entering characters
until the menu item OK is automatically
highlighted, then press the
controller $.
The entry of the state/province is
complete. You can enter the desired
street, see below.
Option 2: Push % the controller $.
or
After entering at least one character,
push ( the controller $ and select the
menu item OK manually.
In both cases,the hit list is now active.
Select an entry in the hit ! list.
The entry of the state/province is
complete. You can enter the desired
street.
Entering a street
!"Before entering a street, make sure that the
correct state/province has been entered,
see section "Entering a state/province" on
page 194.
Open the address input menu, see
section "Opening the address input
menu" on page 193.
!Input progress display
"Hit list
#Input field
$Currently highlighted character
%Number of hits in the hit list "
&Predictive speller
'Confirm entry
(Delete all characters in the input field
*Delete individual characters in the input
field
+Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller
Entering/deleting characters
To enter a character: In the predictive
speller &, highlight a character and
press the controller $.
The character is entered and appears in
the input field #.
!"Not all of the characters displayed can be
highlighted in the predictive speller &. The
characters that can be highlighted depend
on those already entered and the data for
the digital map.
Before any character is entered, the hit list
" is empty. Each time you enter a
character, the hit list is narrowed down in
accordance with the characters already
entered.
As soon as the entry is unambiguous, the
hit list contains just one entry. Once you
reach this stage you cannot enter any
further characters, you can only complete
entry.
196
Navigation
Entering destinations
To delete individual characters in the
input field #: Select the menu item
*.
The last character entered is deleted.
To delete all characters in the input
field #: Push ( the controller $ and
select the menu item Delete All.
All characters are deleted.
Completing entry
Option 1: Keep entering characters
until the menu item OK is automatically
highlighted, then press the
controller $.
The entry of the street is complete.
If there is only one city matching to the
street, you can enter a house number,
see section "Entering a house number"
on page 197.
If there are several towns/cities
matching to the street, you can enter a
city, see section "Entering a city" on
page 196.
Option 2: Push % the controller $.
or
After entering at least one character,
push ( the controller $ and select the
menu item OK.
In both cases, the hit list " is now
active.
Select an entry in the hit list.
In both cases, entry of the street is
complete.
If there is only one city matching to the
street, you can enter a house number,
see section "Entering a house number"
on page 197.
If there are several towns/cities
matching to the street, you can enter a
city, see section "Entering a city" on
page 196.
Entering a city
!"Before entering a city, you must enter a
street, see section "Entering a street" on
page 195.
!Input progress display
"Number of hits in the hit list #
#Hit list of towns/cities matching to the
already entered street
197
Navigation
Entering destinations
To enter a city: Proceed as previously
when entering a street, see section
"Entering a street" on page 195.
If house numbers for the entered street
are available, you can enter a house
number, see section "Entering a house
number" on page 197.
If no house numbers are available for
the entered street, entry of the
destination is complete and you see the
corresponding destination on the map.
Further options are now available, see
the section "Options after entering the
destination" on page 214.
Entering a house number
!"Before entering a house number, you must
enter a city, see section "Entering a city" on
page 196.
If there are two or more house number
ranges available for the entered street, you
can select a house number range, see
section "Selecting a house number" on
page 197.
If there is only one house number range
available for the entered street, you can
enter the house number, see section
"Entering a house number" on page 197.
Selecting a house number
!Input progress display
"List of house number ranges
Select the desired house number
range.
Now you can enter a house number.
Entering a house number
!Input progress display
"Currently highlighted character
#Input field
$Predictive speller
%Confirm entry
&Delete all characters in the input field
'Delete individual characters in the input
field
(Switch character set
*Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller
198
Navigation
Entering destinations
To enter a character: In the predictive
speller $, highlight a character and
press the controller $.
The character is entered and appears in
the input field #.
To delete individual characters in the
input field #: Select the menu item
'.
The last character entered is deleted.
To delete all characters in the input
field #: Push ( the controller $ and
select the menu item Delete All.
All characters are deleted.
To complete the entry: Push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
OK.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
Entering a destination via the
Previous Destinations
Open the Navigation main menu, see
section "Opening the Navigation main
menu" on page 192.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
In the selection list, select the menu
item Previous Destinations.
!"The menu item Previous Destinations
can only be selected if at least one route
guidance to a destination has been started
previously.
After selecting the menu item, you will
see a list of the recent destinations for
which a route guidance session has
been started previously. This list
contains automatically a maximum of
40 previous destinations and, at the top
of the list, the last previous start point.
To select a destination: Select a list
entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
Entering a destination via
Intersection input
!"Before entering a destination via
Intersection input, make sure that the
correct state/province has been entered,
see section "Entering a state/province" on
page 194.
Open the Navigation main menu, see
section "Opening the Navigation main
menu" on page 192.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
199
Navigation
Entering destinations
In selection list, select the menu item
Intersection.
Now you can enter the first street.
To enter the first street: Proceed as
previously when entering a street, see
section "Entering a street" on page 195.
After entering the first street, you can
enter the second street.
To enter the second street: Proceed
as previously when entering a street,
see section "Entering a street" on
page 195.
If the intersection is unambiguous, entry
of the destination is complete and you
see the corresponding destination on
the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
If the intersection is ambiguous, you
must enter the city.
To enter the city: Proceed as
previously described in section
"Entering a city" on page 196.
After entering the city, entry of the
destination is complete and you see the
corresponding destination on the map.
Further options are now available, see
the section "Options after entering the
destination" on page 214.
Entering a POI destination via POI
name
Opening the POI name input menu
Open the Navigation main menu, see
section "Opening the Navigation main
menu" on page 192.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
In the selection list, select the menu
item Point of Interest.
The POI main menu appears.
!POI main menu
In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Name.
The POI name input menu appears.
200
Navigation
Entering destinations
!Input progress display (in the example
currently entered state/province)
"Hit list (empty if no name has been
entered)
#Input field
$Predictive speller
%Menu item for setting a category/city
filter
&Delete all characters in the input field
'Menu item for entering the state/
province
!"Before entering a POI name, make sure that
the correct state/province has been entered,
see section below.
Entering a state/province
In the POI name input menu, Push (
the controller $, select the menu item
State/Prov. and proceed as previously
described in the section "Entering a
state/province" on page 194.
After entering the state/province, the
POI name input menu appears again.
Now you can enter a POI name.
Entering a POI name
!Input progress display (in the example
currently entered state/province)
"Hit list (empty if no name has been
entered)
#Input field
$Currently highlighted character
%Number of hits in the hit list "
&Predictive speller
'Menu item for setting a category/city
filter
(Delete all characters in the input field
*Delete individual characters in the input
field
+Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller
To enter a character: In the predictive
speller &, highlight a character and
press the controller $.
The character is entered and appears in
the input field #.
!"Not all of the characters displayed can be
highlighted in the predictive speller &. The
characters that can be highlighted depend
on those already entered and the data for
the digital map.
Before any character is entered, the hit list
" is empty. Each time you enter a
character, the hit list is narrowed down in
accordance with the characters already
entered.
201
Navigation
Entering destinations
As soon as the entry is unambiguous, the
hit list contains just one entry. Once you
reach this stage you cannot enter any
further characters, you can only complete
entry.
To delete individual characters in the
input field #: Select the menu item
*.
The last character entered is deleted.
To delete all characters in the input
field #: Push ( the controller $ and
select the menu item Delete All.
All characters are deleted.
To complete the entry: Push % the
controller $.
You will see the POI list.
!POI list
"POI with sub entries (number of sub
entries)
Select an entry in the POI list.
If you have selected a POI with sub
entries, you can select a sub entry.
After selecting an entry without sub
entries or after selecting a sub entry,
entry of the POI destination is complete
and you see the corresponding
destination on the map. Further options
are now available, see the section
"Options after entering the destination"
on page 214.
Category/city filter
After entering at least one character of the
POI name, you can set a category/city filter
to narrow down the available POIs.
In the name input menu, push ( the
controller $ and select the menu item
Filter.
You will see the filter main menu.
!Input progress display
"Hit list
#Currently filter status
$Number of hits in the hit list "
202
Navigation
Entering destinations
To set the category or the city filter:
Select the menu item Category or
City.
The menu for entering a category or a
city appears.
Ilustration shows the menu for entering a
category as an example
!Hit list
"Menu item OK
To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
POI name, see section "Entering a POI
name" on page 200.
Option 1 to complete the entry: Keep
entering characters until the hit ! list
contains just one entry.
The menu item OK is automatically
highlighted.
Press the controller $.
The filter main menu appears again.
You can open the POI list now, see
below.
Option 2 to complete the entry:
Push % the controller $.
or
After entering at least one character,
push ( the controller $ and select the
menu item OK.
In both cases, the hit list ! is active
now.
Select an entry in the hit list !.
The filter main menu appears again.
You can open the POI list.
To open the POI list: In the filter main
menu, push % the controller $.
The POI list appears.
!POI list
"POI with sub entries (number of sub
entries)
Select an entry in the POI list.
If you have selected a POI with sub
entries, you can select a sub entry.
After selecting an entry without sub
entries or after selecting a sub entry,
entry of the POI destination is complete
and you see the corresponding
destination on the map. Further options
are now available, see the section
"Options after entering the destination"
on page 214.
203
Navigation
Entering destinations
Entering a POI destination via POI
category
Opening the POI category main menu
Open the Navigation main menu, see
section "Opening the Navigation main
menu" on page 192.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
In the selection list, select the menu
item Point of Interest.
The POI main menu appears.
!POI main menu
In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Category.
The POI category main menu appears.
!POI category main menu
The following options are available:
Selecting a category with POIs near to
a particular city center, see section
"POIs near to a particular city center" on
page 204.
Selecting a category with POIs along
the route or near to a destination
already entered or near to the current
position, see below.
POIs along the route or near to a
destination already entered or near to
the current position
Open the POI category main menu, see
section "Opening the POI category
main menu" on page 203.
In the POI category main menu, select
the menu item Along Route or Near
Destination or Near Here.
The category input menu appears. You
can enter a category name.
!Hit list
"Menu item OK
204
Navigation
Entering destinations
To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
POI name, see section "Entering a POI
name" on page 200.
Option 1 to complete the entry: Keep
entering characters until the hit ! list
contains just one entry.
The menu item OK is automatically
highlighted.
Press the controller $.
The POI list appears, see illustration
below.
Option 2 to complete the entry:
Push % the controller $.
or
After entering at least one character,
push ( the controller $ and select the
menu item OK.
In both cases, the hit list ! is active
now.
Select an entry in the hit list !.
The POI list appears.
!Sorting menu item
"Input progress display
#Number of hits in the POI list &
$Distance to the POI
%Direction to the POI
&POI list
To sort the POI list: Select the menu
item Sort Alphabetically or Sort by
Distance.
The POI list is resorted. The sorting
status is identified by the icon to the left
of the menu item.
Icon = list is sorted alphabetical
Icon = list is sorted by distance
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
To select a POI: Select a list entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
POIs near to a particular city center
Open the POI category main menu, see
section "Opening the POI category
main menu" on page 203.
In the POI category main menu, select
the menu item Near City Center.
The city input menu appears. You can
enter a city.
!Hit list
"Menu item State/Prov.
#Menu item OK
205
Navigation
Entering destinations
!"Before entering a city, make sure that the
correct state/province has been entered.
Entering a state/province
Select the menu item State/Prov. and
proceed as previously described, see
section "Entering a state/province" on
page 194.
Entering a city
To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
POI name, see section "Entering a POI
name" on page 200.
Option 1 to complete entering a city:
Keep entering characters until the hit !
list contains just one entry.
The menu item OK is automatically
highlighted.
Press the controller $.
Now you can enter a POI category, see
the corresponding section below.
Option 2 to complete entering a city:
Push % the controller $.
or
After entering at least one character,
push ( the controller $ and select the
menu item OK.
In both cases, the hit list ! is active
now.
Select an entry in the hit list !.
Now you can enter a POI category.
Entering a POI category
!Hit list
"Menu item OK
To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
POI name, see section "Entering a POI
name" on page 200.
Option 1 to complete the entry: Keep
entering characters until the hit ! list
contains just one entry.
The menu item OK is automatically
highlighted.
Press the controller $.
The POI list appears, see illustration
below.
Option 2 to complete the entry:
Push % the controller $.
or
After entering at least one character,
push ( the controller $ and select the
menu item OK.
In both cases, the hit list ! is active
now.
Select an entry in the hit list !.
The POI list appears.
206
Navigation
Entering destinations
!Sorting menu item
"Input progress display
#Number of hits in the POI list %
$Distance to the POI
%POI list
To sort the POI list: Select the menu
item Sort Alphabetically or Sort by
Distance.
The POI list is resorted. The sorting
status is identified by the icon to the left
of the menu item.
Icon = list is sorted alphabetical
Icon = list is sorted by distance
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
To select a POI: Select a list entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
Entering a POI destination via POI
phone number
Open the POI category main menu, see
section "Opening the POI category
main menu" on page 203.
In the POI category main menu, select
the menu item Phone Number.
The phone number input menu
appears.
!Input field
"Predictive speller
#Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller
$Confirm entry
%Delete all characters in the input field
&Delete individual characters in the input
field
'Menu item for entering the state/
province
(Currently highlighted character
*Input progress display (in the example
currently entered state/province)
!"Before entering a phone number, make sure
that the correct state/province has been
entered.
207
Navigation
Entering destinations
Entering a state/province
Push ( the controller $, select the
menu item State/Prov. and proceed as
previously described, see section
"Entering a state/province" on
page 194.
Entering a phone number
To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
house number, see section "Entering a
house number" on page 197.
To complete the entry: Push ( the
controller $, select the menu item OK.
If the phone number is unambiguous,
entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
If the phone number is ambiguous, a
POI list appears.
The followiong screenshot is an
example, taken from the Navi HMI
flowchart.
!POI list
"Distances to the POIs
Below is the provided screenshot. It
doesn’t contain the "Sort" menu item as
shown in the example above. A new
screenshot with the "Sort" menu item is
needed.
To sort the POI list: Select the menu
item Sort Alphabetically or Sort by
Distance.
The POI list is resorted. The sorting
status is identified by the icon to the left
of the menu item.
Icon = list is sorted alphabetical
Icon = list is sorted by distance
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
To select a POI: Select a list entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
208
Navigation
Entering destinations
Entering a POI destination via a
vicinity search
!"POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
If the map is in position mode, you can
search for POIs in the vicinity of the vehicle;
if the map is in scroll mode, you can search
for POIs in the vicinity of the crosshairs.
For information on position and scroll
mode, refer to the section "Position/scroll
mode within the map display" on page 187.
Entry of a POI destination via a vicinity
search is divided into the following steps:
1. Activating/deactivating POI categories
2. Selecting a POI in the POI list or
Selecting a POI in the map
Opening the Options menu
In the map screen, press the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
Opening the POI menu
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Display POI Icons.
The POI menu appears; you can now
activate or deactivate POI categories or
subcategories. Activating one or more
categories or subcategories restricts
the POI search to these categories or
subcategories.
To close the menus: Press the .
button repeatedly until all of the menus
are closed.
!POI menu
"Icons of POI categories already
activated
Activating/deactivating POI categories
!"You can activate a maximum of five
categories.
In the POI menu ", select categories
from the five topmost menu items.
The corresponding categories will be
activated or deactivated, depending on
the previous status. The status display
to the left of the menu item changes
accordingly.
Display # = category deactivated
Display $ = category activated
The icon for the activated category
appears simultaneously in the display
!.
To deactivate all categories or
subcategories: In the POI menu,
select the menu item Unmark All.
All categories or subcategories are
deactivated.
After activating at least one category,
you can select a POI in the map or in a
list, see descriptions below.
209
Navigation
Entering destinations
Menu item "Others"
!"Selecting the menu item Others leads to a
selection of further categories or
subcategories.
In the POI menu ", select the menu
item Others.
A category list appears.
Select a category.
A subcategory list appears.
Select a subcategory.
To close the subcategory and
category lists: Press the . button
repeatedly until the POI menu appears
again.
After selecting at least one category or
subcategory, you can select a POI in
the map or in a list, see descriptions
below.
Selecting a POI in the map
To close the menus: Press the .
button repeatedly until all of the menus
are closed.
The map display appears. The
available POIs in accordance with the
activated categories/subcategories are
shown as icons.
To select a POI: Keep moving the map
until the desired POI is in the
crosshairs. To do so, proceed as
described in the section "Moving the
map/setting the map scale" on
page 190.
To confirm selection: Press the
controller $.
If the selection is invalid, you will see an
appropriate message.
To close the message: Press the
controller $.
You can select a POI in the map
again.
If the selection is valid, entry of the
destination is complete. Further options
are now available, see the section
"Options after entering the destination"
on page 214.
Selecting a POI in the POI list
To call up the POI list: In the POI
menu, select the menu item Show POI
List.
A list with POIs corresponding to the
previously selected categories or
subcategories appears.
The illustration shows an example display
with route filtering deactivated
!Activate/deactivate route filtering
"Distance of the POI from the vehicle
position
#Direction to the POI
$POI list
210
Navigation
Entering destinations
The illustration shows an example display
with route filtering activated
!Direction in which you must leave the
route to get to the POI
When route filtering is activated, the list will
show only POIs along the route.
When route filtering is deactivated, the list
will show additionally POIs not along the
route.
!"You can only activate route filtering when
route guidance is active.
To activate/deactivate route filtering:
In the POI list, select the menu item
Along Route.
Route filtering will be activated or
deactivated, depending on the previous
status. The status display to the left of
the menu item changes accordingly.
Display # = function deactivated
Display $ = function activated
To select a POI: Select a POI in the list.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
Entering a destination via the
Address Book
Calling up the Address Book
Open the Navigation main menu, see
section "Opening the Navigation main
menu" on page 192.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
Select the menu item Address Book.
The Address Book appears.
!Address book
Selecting the destination in the Address
Book
Option 1
Select one of the following destination
Address Book categories:
Home
Work
Favorite Point 1
Favorite Point 2
Favorite Point 3
Favorite Point 4
211
Navigation
Entering destinations
!"If a category does not yet contain a
destination, then that respective category
cannot be selected. Refer to the section
"Saving/deleting destinations in the Address
Book" on page 232 to find out how to store
destinations.
After you select a category, entry of the
destination is complete and you see the
corresponding destination on the map.
Further options are now available, see
the section "Options after entering the
destination" on page 214.
Option 2
Select the Address Book category
Address List.
After you select the category, you will
see a list of the destinations you have
stored. This list contains a maximum of
200 entries.
!"Refer to the section "Saving/deleting
destinations in the Address Book"
on page 232 to find out how to store
destinations.
To sort the list by date of storage or
alphabetical: Select the menu item
Sort by Date or Sort Alphabetically.
The list is resorted. The sorting status is
identified by the icon to the left of the
menu item.
Icon = list is sorted by date of
storage
Icon = list is sorted alphabetical
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
To select a destination: Select a list
entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
Entering an emergency destination
!"Emergency destinations are Hospitals or
Police stations, for example.
Open the Navigation main menu, see
section "Opening the Navigation main
menu" on page 192.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
Select the menu item Emergency.
The Emergency category list appears.
!Emergency category list
212
Navigation
Entering destinations
Select the desired category, e.g.
POLICE STATION.
A POI list appears.
!Sorting menu item
"Input progress display
#Number of hits in the POI list &
$Distance to the POI
%Direction to the POI
&POI list
To sort the POI list: Select the menu
item Sort Alphabetically or Sort by
Distance.
The POI list is resorted. The sorting
status is identified by the icon to the left
of the menu item.
Icon = list is sorted alphabetical
Icon = list is sorted by distance
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
To select a POI: Select a list entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on page 214.
Entering a destination via the map
Calling up the map
Option 1
Briefly press the / button.
The map appears.
Option 2
Press and hold the . button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
In the selection list, select the item
Map.
The map appears.
Selecting the destination in the map
Keep moving the map until the desired
destination is in the crosshairs. To do
so, proceed as described in the section
"Moving the map/setting the map scale"
on page 190.
To confirm selection: Press the
controller $.
If the selection is not a valid destination,
you will see an appropriate message.
To close the message: Press the
controller $.
You can select another destination
in the map.
If the selection is a valid destination and
it is either on a highway, on a motor
way, on a bridge or in a tunnel, you will
be prompted to confirm that you wish to
accept the destination.
213
Navigation
Entering destinations
To confirm the destination: Select
Yes.
Entry of the destination is complete.
Further options are now available,
see the section "Options after
entering the destination" on
page 214.
To reject the destination: Select No.
You can select another destination
in the map.
If the selection is a valid destination and
it is not on a highway, on a main road,
on a bridge or in a tunnel, entry of the
destination is complete.
Further options are now available, see
the section "Options after entering the
destination" on page 214.
214
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Options after entering the
destination
After you have entered the destination, you
will see the destination on the map and, on
the right-hand side of the display, the
Options menu with information about the
destination.
Example screenshot, it comes from the
Korean manual.
!Current time
"Information about the destination
!"The information about the destination " will
not be available if you entered the
destination via the map.
#Options menu
$Destination
%Distance and direction to the
destination
&Estimated time of arrival
Below is the provided US screenshot. It
doesn’t contain information marked
with numbers !, %, and & as seen in
the example screenshot on the left.
Doesn’t the US system show this
information?
The functions available in the Options
menu # will vary depending on the
following factors:
Whether the destination was entered
via the map
Whether route guidance to a
destination is already active
!"The illustration above shows the Options
menu when route guidance is already active
and the new destination was not entered via
the map.
Functions possibly available in the Options
menu:
Conforming the destination, see
page 215
Adding the destination to an existing
route as a waypoint (only available if
route guidance is already active), see
page 215
Add the destination to the Address
Book , see page 215
Initiating a call to a POI, see page 216
!"POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
Adjusting the destination position (only
available if the destination was not
entered via the map), see page 216
215
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
Conforming the destination
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Set Destination or Replace
Destination.
!"The menu item Set Destination is only
available if route guidance is not yet active.
The menu item Replace Destination is
only available if a route to a destination has
already been calculated.
Selecting either of these two menu
items confirms the destination. If the
menu item Replace Destination is
selected, the previous destination and
all waypoints are first discarded.
After the destination is confirmed, the
system starts to calculate the route, see
the section "Route calculation" on
page 216.
Adding the destination to an
existing route as a waypoint
!"You can add a maximum of three waypoints
to the route.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Add Waypoint.
!"The menu item Add Waypoint is not
available if route guidance is not yet active
or if four waypoints already exist.
The system adds the previously
entered destination as a waypoint.
!"A new waypoint is always added as the
second last destination; the last destination
is always the main destination. Any existing
waypoints are moved accordingly when a
new waypoint is added.
If the vehicle is moving, the system
calculates a new route, see the section
"Route calculation" on page 216.
If the vehicle is not moving, the
destination list appears. You can now
change the position of the waypoint in
the destination list.
To change the position of the
waypoint: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired
position is reached.
To confirm the position: Press the
controller $.
The system calculates a new route,
see the section "Route calculation"
on page 216.
Add the destination to the Address
Book
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Add to Address Book.
!"The menu item Add to Address Book
cannot be selected if there are already
200 destinations saved in the category
Address List of the address book.
The crosshairs center will be saved as
destination in the category Address
List of the address book. When saving,
the system sets the standard icon in
the map at the destination position; this
icon remains visible in the map even
after the save operation.
216
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
The system automatically uses the
address as the destination name when
saving. You can edit the name and
assign a different icon later, see the
section "Editing an entry" on page 239.
Initiating a call to a POI
!"POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example. This function is only available if
the following conditions are met:
The entered destination is a POI.
The digital map contains the phone
number of the POI.
There is a mobile phone connected with
the system.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Dial Number.
The system initiates the call.
Adjusting the destination position
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Adjust Position.
The Options menu is closed.
Keep moving the map until the
destination position is in the crosshairs
center. To do so, proceed as described
in the section "Moving the map/setting
the map scale" on page 190.
To confirm the position: Press the
controller $.
If the position is invalid, you will see an
appropriate message.
To close the message: Press the
controller $.
You can adapt the destination
position again.
If the position is valid, the Options menu
reappears and all previously described
options are once more available.
Route calculation
After the destination entry has been
confirmed, route calculation starts.
During route calculation, the message
Route Calculation in Progress Please
wait. appears.
If the destination is too close to the current
vehicle position, the message Destination
ist too close to the current location.
Please use the map for guidance.
appears.
After the route has been calculated, you will
see the entire route including start/
destination and any waypoints in the map.
To the right of the map you will see route
information and the Options menu.
217
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
Options menu
Example screenshot, it comes from the
Korean manual.
!Current time
"Distance to the destination and time
remaining
#Route information
$Options menu
%Destination (Icon )
&Waypoints (Icons )
'Distance and direction to the
destination
(Estimated time of arrival
*Current vehicle position
+Route
Below is the provided US screenshot, it
doesn’t contain information marked
with the numbers !, ' and ( in the
example screenshot on the left. Doesn’t
the US system show this information?
The following functions are available in the
Options menu $:
Starting route guidance, see page 217
Alternative routes, see page 217
Route information, see page 218
Simulation, see page 219
Adding and changing waypoints, see
page 219
Starting route guidance
!"Route guidance is automatically started
after a certain time without operation.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Start Route Guidance.
The system starts route guidance, see
the section "Route guidance" on
page 220.
Alternative routes
In addition to already calculated routes, the
system can calculate up to four alternative
routes. This function is only available if all
the following conditions are met:
The vehicle is stationary.
The route does not contain any
waypoints.
Route guidance has not yet been
started.
218
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
Calculating alternative routes
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Other Routes.
The system calculates the alternative
routes.
After the routes have been calculated,
you will see all calculated routes on the
map and, on the right-hand side, route
information as well as the route menu.
!Current vehicle position
"Route information
#Route menu
$Destination (Icon )
The various routes are indicated with
differently colored symbols in the route
menu #. The routes displayed on the map
are also colored accordingly.
Information about a route
Highlight a route in the route menu #.
You will see information about the
highlighted route in the display ".
Comparing routes
In the Route menu, select the menu
item Route Comparison.
The route comparison list appears.
It contains the following reference
information for each route:
Journey time
Journey distance
To close the list: Briefly press
the . button.
Selecting a route and starting route
guidance
Select a route in the Route menu or in
the route comparison list.
The Options menu appears again.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Start Route Guidance.
The system starts route guidance, see
the section "Route guidance" on
page 220.
Route information
!"This function is only available when the
vehicle is stationary.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Turn by Turn.
A list containing the following
information about the route appears.
Current vehicle position and the
destination , including the journey
time to the destination.
If waypoints have been entered, the
waypoints , including the journey
times to the destinations.
Roads to be traveling, including the
length of the route to be travelled.
!"The route section list is not refreshed while
it is on-screen.
Scrolling through the list
To scroll line by line: Turn +, the
controller $.
To scroll page by page: Push '(
the controller $.
219
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
Closing the list
Briefly press the . button.
Simulation
!"This function is only available when the
vehicle is stationary. It simulates the journey
to the entered destination.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Simulate Route.
The system simulates the journey to the
entered destination.
To cancel the simulation: Briefly
press the . button.
Adding and changing waypoints
!"This function is only available if the vehicle
is stationary and if at least one destination
has already been entered. You can use it to
add up to four waypoints to the route, to
change the order of the waypoints, to show
destinations in the map and to delete
destinations.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Change Route.
The Waypoint menu appears.
Continue as described in the section
"Waypoints" on page 224.
220
Navigation
Route guidance
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Safety instructions
General information
Route guidance starts after the route has
been calculated and the appropriate menu
item has been selected.
During route guidance, the system guides
you to the destination by means of audible
driving recommendations and route
guidance displays.
If you leave the recommended route, the
system automatically calculates a new
route to your destination.
Audible driving recommendations
In the section "Audible driving
recommendations" from page 190, you will
find information on the following:
Setting the volume of the audible
driving recommendations
Activating/deactivating audible driving
recommendations
Calling up a current audible driving
recommendation
Route guidance displays
The route guidance displays are only
visible if the display is switched to map
display and if the map display is in position
mode and not scroll mode.
!"For information on position mode, refer to
the section "Position/scroll mode within the
map display" on page 187.
To switch the display to map display
or the map display to position mode:
Press the / button.
The display switches and the system
simultaneously outputs a current
audible driving recommendation.
Sample displays
A number of sample displays are shown on
the next page.
WARNING
During route guidance, the following factors
may increase the accident hazard:
Distraction from the traffic situation.
Failure to observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities.
Inappropriate audible driving
recommendations or route guidance
displays as a result of the reality not
matching the data on the digital map,
for example due to road works or
modified road routing.
Always observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities. They
always have priority over the audible driving
recommendations or route guidance
displays by the system.
221
Navigation
Route guidance
Example screenshot, it comes from the
Korean manual.
!Current time
"Estimated time of arrival at main
destination
#Distance/direction indicator
$Vehicle position
%Route
&Waypoints (Icon )
'Main destination
!"You can switch the distance/direction
indicator # between displaying the data for
the waypoint or for the main destination, see
the section "Switching the distance/direction
display" on page 223.
Below is the provided US screenshot, it
doesn’t contain information marked
with the numbers !, " and # in the
example screenshot on the left. New US
screenshot with this information is
needed.
Junction zoom
When a driving manoeuvre is imminent, the
map display is automatically split. The left-
hand side of the display shows the current
map view, while the right-hand side shows
the junction zoom. The split is automatically
cancelled once the driving manoeuvre is
completed.
Hier gehts weiter
Correct screenshot needed, this one is
only an example.
!Vehicle position
"Point at which the next driving
manoeuvre takes place
#Distance indicator to the next driving
manoeuvre
$Right-hand side of the display with
junction zoom
222
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Suspending route guidance
To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the /
button.
The map display appears.
To open the Options menu: Press the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Suspend Guidance.
Route guidance is suspended; you
will see an appropriate display that
disappears after a short time.
Resuming route guidance
!"You can resume route guidance after
suspension without having to re-enter the
destination.
To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the /
button.
The map display appears.
To open the Options menu: Press the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Resume Guidance.
You will see an appropriate display that
automatically disappears after a short
time. The system then resumes route
guidance.
Displaying the calculated route
again
!"During route guidance, you can display the
complete calculated route again.
To display the route again: Briefly
press or press and hold the .
button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Route Overview.
You will once more see the map display
with the calculated route and the
Options menu.
The following functions are now
available in the Options menu:
To resume route guidance:
Select the menu item Goto Map
Screen.
To display route information (only
when the vehicle is stationary):
Select the menu item Turn by
Turn.
Please see the section "Route
information" on page 218 for the
rest of the description of this
function.
To add and change waypoints (only
when the vehicle is stationary):
Select the menu item Change
Route.
The Waypoint menu appears.
Please see the section "Waypoints"
on page 224 for the rest of the
description of this function.
223
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
Changing the route
!"You can use this function to switch route
guidance to one of the four possible
alternative routes. The alternative routes
must have been calculated in advance,
see the section "Alternative routes" on
page 217.
Calling up the Route menu
To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the /
button.
The map display appears.
To open the Options menu: Press the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Reroute/Detour options.
The Route menu appears, the current
active route is marked with the icon ".
Now you can select another route or
block a route section.
Selecting another route
Select one of the following menu items:
Shorter Time
Shortest Distance
Minimize Freeway
Minimize Toll Road
The system calculates a new route.
Blocking a route section
!"You can use this function to block a specific
stretch of the route section still to be
travelled for the route guidance. The system
then calculates a detour route if possible.
Select one of the following menu items:
Detour 1 mi/km
Detour 2 mi/km
Detour 5 mi/km
Detour 10 mi/km
Depending on the menu item selected,
the relevant stretch in the route section
still be to travelled will be blocked and
the system will start to calculate the
route.
Switching the distance/direction
display
!"If the map display is in position mode, the
system can either show the distance/
direction to the main destination or the
distance/direction to the next waypoint. You
can use this function to switch the display.
Correct screenshot needed, this one is
only an example.
!Distance/direction indicator
Icon = main destination
Icon = waypoint
To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the /
button.
The map display appears.
224
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
To open the Options menu: Press the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Distance to.
The display is switched.
Waypoints
The following waypoint functions are
available:
Opening/closing the waypoint menu,
see page 224
Adding waypoints, see page 224
Changing the order of the destinations,
see page 226
Showing destinations in the map, see
page 226
Deleting a waypoint or the main
destination, see page 227
Deleting all waypoints and the main
destination, see page 227
Opening/closing the waypoint menu
Press and hold the . button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
To open the waypoint menu: In the
Navigation main menu, select the menu
item Change Route.
The Waypoint menu appears.
Correct screenshot needed, this one is
only an example.
!Main destination (Icon )
"Waypoints (Icons )
#Current position
To close the Waypoint menu: Select
the menu item Done.
You will see the calculated route and
the Options menu.
Further functions are available in the
Options menu, for example start route
guidance. Please see the section "Options
menu" on page 217 for a description of the
Options menu.
Adding waypoints
!"You can add up to three waypoints to the
route.
In the Waypoint menu, select the menu
item Add Waypoint.
A selection list appears. You now have
several options for adding a waypoint,
see the descriptions below.
You have further operation options after
you have added waypoints, see the
section "After waypoints have been
added" on page 226
225
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
Entering a waypoint via the address
Select the list item Address.
Enter the address. Please see from the
section "Entering a destination via the
address" on page 193 onwards for the
rest of the description of this function.
Entering a waypoint via the Previous
Destinations
Select the list item Previous
Destinations.
Select a destination. Please see from
the section "Entering a destination via
the Previous Destinations" on page 198
onwards for the rest of this function.
Entering a waypoint via Intersection
input
Select the list item Intersection.
Enter the streets. Please see from the
section "Entering a destination via
Intersection input" on page 198
onwards for the rest of this function.
Entering a POI as a waypoint
Select the list item Point of Interest.
The POI main menu appears.
In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Name and enter a POI
destination. Please see from the
section "Entering a POI destination via
POI name" on page 199 onwards for
the rest of this function.
or
In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Category and enter a POI
destination. Please see from the
section "Entering a POI destination via
POI category" on page 203 onwards for
the rest of this function.
or
In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Phone Number and enter a POI
destination. Please see from the
section "Entering a POI destination via
POI phone number" on page 206
onwards for the rest of this function.
Entering a waypoint via the Address
Book
Select the list item Address Book.
Select a destination. Please see from
the section "Entering a destination via
the Address Book" on page 210
onwards for the rest of this function.
Entering an emergency destination as a
waypoint
Select the list item Emergency.
Select a emergency category. Please
see from the section "Entering an
emergency destination" on page 211
onwards for the rest of this function.
Entering a waypoint via the map
Select the list item Map.
Select a destination in the map. Please
see from the section "Entering a
destination via the map" on page 212
onwards for the rest of this function.
226
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
After waypoints have been added
If the vehicle is moving, the new route is
immediately calculated after a waypoint is
added. The new waypoint was added as
the second last destination. The main
destination remains the last destination,
any existing waypoints are moved
accordingly.
If the vehicle is stationary, the Waypoint
menu appears after a waypoint is added.
The new waypoint was added as the
second last destination. The main
destination remains the last destination,
any existing waypoints are moved
accordingly.
To change the position of the added
waypoint: Turn +, the controller $
until the destination is at the desired
position.
Press the controller $.
This confirms the position.
The following functions are now available:
Changing the order of the destinations,
see page 226
Showing destinations in the map,
see page 226
Deleting a waypoint or the main
destination, see page 227
Deleting all waypoints and the main
destination, see page 227
Changing the order of the destinations
Highlight a destination in the Waypoint
menu.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Change Order.
Turn +, the controller $ until the
destination is at the desired position.
Press the controller $.
This confirms the new position.
Showing destinations in the map
Highlight a destination in the Waypoint
menu.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Show on Map.
The map display appears. It shows the
selected destination.
To change the map scale: Turn +,
the controller $ until the desired scale
is reached.
To return to the Waypoint menu:
Briefly press the . button.
!"The display automatically switches back to
the Waypoint menu after a certain time
without operation.
227
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
Deleting a waypoint or the main
destination
Highlight a waypoint or the main
destination in the Waypoint menu.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the relevant
destination.
Select Yes or No.
The destination will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
!"The Navigation main menu automatically
appears if there are no more destinations.
Deleting all waypoints and the main
destination
Highlight a waypoint in the Waypoint
menu.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all waypoints.
Select Yes or No.
All waypoints and the main destination
will be deleted or retained, depending
on the answer selected. The Navigation
main menu automatically appears after
the deletion.
228
Navigation
Functions independent of route guidance
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Freeway information
!"As soon as you start driving on a freeway,
the system will automatically show you
freeway information provided the function
"Show Freeway Mode" is activated and no
driving manoeuvre is imminent.
Please refer to the section "Map display
settings" on page 243 to find out how to
activate or deactivate the function.
The freeway mode shows you the
following:
The next three stations on the freeway
as icons, e.g. rest areas or exits,
the distance to the stations,
the available services at the stations,
the freeway currently being driven on
and
turns as icons.
In the sample illustration below, the first
station is a rest area.
Correct screenshot needed, the
following picture is only an example
(taken from the styleguide) / Please
produce a screenshot that matches to
the description under the following
example picture.
!Icons for the next three stations
"Distance to a station
#Freeway currently being driven on
$Icons showing the available services at
the station
%Direction to turn to continue following
the route (only visible if a route
guidance is active)
Turn List
!"As soon as you start driving on a normal
road, the system will automatically show
you a turn list, provided the function "Show
Turn-by-Turn Mode" is activated and no
driving manoeuvre is imminent.
If this function is activated, but the function
"Show Freeway Mode" is deactivated, the
system will show the turn list also when
driving on freeways
Please refer to the section "Map display
settings" on page 243 to find out how to
activate or deactivate the function.
The turn list shows you the following:
The next three turns,
the kind of the turns as icons,
the distance to the turns,
exits as icons and
the road currently being driven on
Correct screenshot needed, the
following is only an example (taken from
the styleguide) / Please produce a
screenshot that matches to the
description under the following example
picture.
229
Navigation
Functions independent of route guidance
!First turn with corresponding icon
"Second turn with corresponding icon
#Third turn with corresponding icon
$Distance to the third turn
%Icon for the exit which must be taken to
continue following the route (only visible
if a route guidance is active)
&Distance to the second turn
'Distance to the first turn
(Road currently being driven on
POI information
!"POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
If the map is in scroll mode and the center
point of the crosshairs points to a POI, you
can call up POI information and initiate a
call to the POI.
!"For information on map scroll mode, refer to
the section "Position/scroll mode within the
map display" on page 187.
To call up the map display: Press
the / button.
The map display appears. The map is
set to position mode.
To set the map to scroll mode: Push
the controller $ in any direction
('(%&)*).
The crosshairs appear.
To move the map: Push and hold the
controller $ in any direction
('(%&)*) until the center of the
crosshairs points to a POI.
Correct screenshot needed, the center
point of the crosshairs must point to a
POI, menu item "POI Info" must be
highlighted.
!Crosshairs
"Options menu
#Menu item POI Info
To call up the POI info: Select the
menu item POI Info.
The POI info menu appears. The top
part of the POI information menu shows
information about the POI.
!"The system can only display the information
stored in the digital map.
To initiate a phone call to the POI: In
the POI information menu, select the
menu item Call.
The system initiates the call.
230
Navigation
Functions independent of route guidance
!"The menu item Call can only be selected if
the following conditions are met:
There is a unique phone number for the
POI stored in the digital map.
There is a mobile phone connected with
the system.
Traffic information
If you have subscribed to the service XM
NavTraffic®, the Driver Information System
is able to:
Automatically receive traffic information
provided by XM® Satellite Radio,
display the Traffic Info list, see
page 230,
display the traffic information in the
map, see page 231 and
take the traffic information into account
during route guidance.
For further information about XM® Satellite
Radio please refer to section "XM®
Satellite Radio information" on page 56 and
visit the following website:
www.xmradio.com
Displaying the Traffic Info list
!"The Traffic Info list contains the available
traffic information.
To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the /
button.
The map display appears.
To open the Options menu: Press the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item NavTraffic Info.
You will see the Traffic Info list.
I’ve produced this screenshot by
myself. Base was a graphic from the
styleguide. It’s not clear if it shows valid
content.
!Trafffic Info list with traffic incidents
"Distance of the traffic incident to the
vehicle position
#Traffic incident
$Icon for the traffic incident
To sort the Traffic Info list: Select the
topmost menu item.
The list is resorted.
The labelling of the topmost menu item
always shows the current sorting
status. It will change with every
selection.
Possible labelings:
Sort by Icon
Sort by Distance
231
Navigation
Functions independent of route guidance
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
To show further information: Select a
list entry.
You will see the further information.
To go back to the Traffic Info list:
Briefly press the . button.
Displaying the traffic information in the
map
Not clear if description is ok
!"If the function "Show Traffic Info on Map" is
activated, the traffic information will be
shown in the map. Please refer to the
section "Map display settings" on page 243
to find out how to activate or deactivate the
function "Show Traffic Info on Map".
The traffic information will be shown in the
map in form of green or red lines beside the
roads affected by the information.
Corresponding icons will be displayed also,
the icons are the same as in the Traffic Info
list, see illustration above.
New screenshot needed, this one is only
an example. It was taken over from the
Korean system.
!Green line
"Red line
#Corresponding icons
Here I will describe what the lines are
standing for, but I don’t know it
Green line =
Red line =
The position of the line (on the right or on
the left side of the road) shows which side
of the road is affected.
232
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Address Book categories
The Address Book is divided into the
following categories:
Home
Work
Favorite Point 1
Favorite Point 2
Favorite Point 3
Favorite Point 4
Address List
You can assign each of the categories
Home, Work, Favorite Point 1, Favorite
Point 2, Favorite Point 3 or Favorite
Point 4 a destination of your choice.
The category Address List holds a
maximum of 200 destinations that you
can define yourself.
Entering a destination via the map
and saving it
Option 1 (for all categories)
!"The following description assumes that
there is no destination stored in the
categories mentioned above. If there is
already a destination stored, proceed as
described in the section "Editing Address
Book entries" page 239.
Selecting a Address Book category
To open the Navigation main menu:
Press and hold the . button.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
In the Address Book editing menu,
select one of the menu items Set
Home, Set Work, Set Favorite Point
1, Set Favorite Point 2, Set Favorite
Point 3 or Set Favorite Point 4.
or
Select the menu item Address List
followed by the menu item Add
Address.
Select the menu item Map.
In both cases, the map display appears.
Selecting the destination in the map
To move the map/set the map scale:
Proceed as described in the section
"Moving the map/setting the map scale"
on page 190.
Saving the destination
To open the Options menu: Press the
controller $.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Set Home or Set Work or Set
Favorite Point 1 or Set Favorite Point
2 or Set Favorite Point 3 or Set
Favorite Point 4 or Add Address.
The crosshairs position is saved as the
destination in the previously selected
category.
233
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
When saving, the system sets the
corresponding icon in the map at the
destination position; the icons remain
visible in the map even after the save
operation.
= Icon for Home
= Icon for Work
= Icon for Favorite Point 1
= Icon for Favorite Point 2
= Icon for Favorite Point 3
= Icon for Favorite Point 4
= Icon for destinations saved in the
Address Book category Address List.
When saving a destination in the category
Address List, the system automatically
uses the address as the destination name.
You can edit the name and assign a
different icon later, see the section "Editing
an entry" on page 239.
You cannot edit the icon and name with the
other Address Book categories.
Option 2 (only for the category Address
List)
To call up the map display: Press
the / button.
To move the map/set the map scale:
Proceed as described in the section
"Moving the map/setting the map scale"
on page 190.
To save the crosshairs center as the
destination: Press the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Add to Address Book.
!"The menu item Add to Address Book
cannot be selected if there are already
200 destinations saved in this category.
The crosshairs center will be saved as
destination in the category Address
List. When saving, the system sets the
standard icon in the map at the
destination position; this icon remains
visible in the map even after the save
operation.
The system automatically uses the
address as the destination name when
saving. You can edit the name and
assign a different icon later, see the
section "Editing an entry" on page 239.
Entering the destination by
conventional means and saving it
!"The following description assumes that
there is no destination stored in the
categories Home, Work, Favorite Point 1,
Favorite Point 2, Favorite Point 3 and
Favorite Point 4. If there is already a
destination stored, proceed as described in
the section "Editing Address Book entries"
on page 239.
Selecting a Address Book category
To open the Navigation main menu:
Press and hold the . button.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
234
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
In the Address Book editing menu,
select one of the menu items Set
Home, Set Work, Set Favorite Point
1, Set Favorite Point 2, Set Favorite
Point 3 or Set Favorite Point 4.
or
In the Address Book editing menu,
select the menu item Address List
followed by the menu item Add
Address.
In both cases, a selection list appears.
Now you have several options to enter
a destination.
Entering a destination
Entering a destination via the address
Select the list item Address.
Enter the address. Please see from the
section "Entering a destination via the
address" on page 193 onwards for the
rest of the description of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section "After a destination has been
entered" on page 235.
Entering a destination via the Previous
Destinations
Select the list item Previous
Destinations.
Select a destination. Please see from
the section "Entering a destination via
the Previous Destinations" on page 198
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section "After a destination has been
entered" on page 235.
Entering a destination via Intersection
input
Select the list item Intersection.
Enter the streets. Please see from the
section "Entering a destination via
Intersection input" on page 198
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section "After a destination has been
entered" on page 235.
Entering a POI as a destination
Select the list item Point of Interest.
The POI main menu appears.
In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Name and enter a POI
destination. Please see from the
section "Entering a POI destination via
POI name" on page 199 onwards for
the rest of this function.
or
In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Category and enter a POI
destination. Please see from the
section "Entering a POI destination via
POI category" on page 203 onwards for
the rest of this function.
or
In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Phone Number and enter a POI
destination. Please see from the
section "Entering a POI destination via
POI phone number" on page 206
onwards for the rest of this function.
235
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section "After a destination has been
entered" on page 235.
Entering a destination via the Address
Book
Select the list item Address Book.
Select a destination. Please see from
the section "Entering a destination via
the Address Book" on page 210
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section "After a destination has been
entered" on page 235.
Entering an emergency destination
Select the list item Emergency.
Select a emergency category. Please
see from the section "Entering an
emergency destination" on page 211
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section "After a destination has been
entered" on page 235.
Entering a destination via the map
Select the list item Map.
Select a destination in the map. Please
see from the section "Entering a
destination via the map" on page 212
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see
below.
After a destination has been entered
After you have entered a destination, you
will see the destination on the map and, on
the right-hand side of the display,
information about the destination as well as
the Options menu.
The Options menu offers access to the
following functions:
Saving the destination, see page 235.
Adjusting the destination position,
see page 236.
Initiating a call to a POI, see page 236.
!"POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
Saving the destination
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Set Home or Set Work or Set
Favorite Point 1 or Set Favorite Point
2 or Set Favorite Point 3, Set Favorite
Point 4 or Add Address.
The destination is saved.
When saving, the system sets the
corresponding icon in the map at the
destination position; the icons remain
visible in the map even after the save
operation.
= Icon for Home
= Icon for Work
= Icon for Favorite Point 1
= Icon for Favorite Point 2
= Icon for Favorite Point 3
= Icon for Favorite Point 4
= Icon for destinations saved in the
Address Book category Address List.
236
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
When saving a destination in the category
Address List, the system automatically
uses the address as the destination name.
You can edit the name and assign a
different icon later, see the section "Editing
an entry" on page 239.
You cannot edit the icon and name with the
other Address Book categories.
Initiating a call to a POI
!"POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example. This function is only available if
the following conditions are met:
The entered destination is a POI.
The digital map contains the phone
number of the POI.
There is a mobile phone connected with
the system.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Dial Number.
The system initiates the call.
Adjusting the destination position
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Adjust Position.
The Options menu is closed.
Keep moving the map until the
destination position is in the crosshairs.
To do so, proceed as described in the
section "Moving the map/setting the
map scale" on page 190.
To confirm the position: Press the
controller $.
If the position is invalid, you will see an
appropriate message.
To close the message: Press the
controller $.
You can adapt the destination
position again.
If the position is valid, the Options menu
reappears and all previously described
options are once more available.
Deleting destinations
Deleting all destinations in the category
Previous Destinations
To open the Navigation main menu:
Press and hold the . button.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
In the Address Book editing menu,
select the menu item Delete Previous
Dest.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all destinations in the
category.
Select Yes or No.
The destinations will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
237
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
Deleting a single destination or all
destinations in the category Address
List
To open the Navigation main menu:
Press and hold the . button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
In the Address Book editing menu,
select the menu item Address List.
The destination list appears.
To sort the list by date of storage or
alphabetical: Select the menu item
Sort by Date or Sort Alphabetically.
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
The list is resorted. The sorting status is
identified by the icon to the left of the
menu item.
Icon = list is sorted by date of
storage.
Icon = list is sorted alphabetical.
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
Highlight a destination.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
Showing the highlighted destination in
the map
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Show on Map.
You will see the destination in the map.
To set the map scale: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired scale is
reached.
To close the map display: Press
the . button.
or
Do nothing for a certain time.
Deleting the highlighted destination
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the destination.
Select Yes or No.
The destination will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
Deleting all destinations
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all the destinations.
Select Yes or No.
The destinations will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
Deleting a destination in a category
except of Previous Destinations and
Address List
To open the Navigation main menu:
Press and hold the . button.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
238
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
In the Address Book editing menu,
highlight one of the menu items Home,
Work, Favorite Point 1, Favorite
Point 2, Favorite Point 3 or Favorite
Point 4.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
Showing the highlighted destination in
the map
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Show on Map.
You will see the destination in the map.
To set the map scale: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired scale is
reached.
To close the map display: Press
the . button.
or
Do nothing for a certain time.
Deleting the highlighted destination
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the destination.
Select Yes or No.
The destination will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
239
Navigation
Editing Address Book entries
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Selecting an Address Book entry
In all categories except Address List
To open the Navigation main menu:
Press and hold the . button.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
In the Address Book editing menu,
select one of the menu items Home,
Work, Favorite Point 1, Favorite
Point 2, Favorite Point 3 or Favorite
Point 4.
The editing menu for the selected entry
appears and you can edit the entry, see
the section "Editing an entry" on
page 239.
In the category Address List
To open the Navigation main menu:
Press and hold the . button.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
In the Address Book editing menu,
select the category Address List.
The destination list appears.
To sort the list by date of storage or
alphabetical: Select the menu item
Sort by Date or Sort Alphabetically.
The list is resorted. The sorting status is
identified by the icon to the left of the
menu item.
Icon = list is sorted by date of
storage.
Icon = list is sorted alphabetical.
!"The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
Select an entry.
The editing menu for the selected entry
appears and you can edit the entry, see
below.
Editing an entry
Editing menu
Correct screenshot needed, this one is
only an example.
!Name data field
"Icon data field
#Position data field
$Phone number data field
%Date data field
240
Navigation
Editing Address Book entries
!"The date data field % shows when the entry
was last edited.
The following functions are available in the
editing menu:
Displaying details, see page 240
Editing the name, see page 240
Switching the name display on/off,
see page 241
Assigning a different icon, see
page 241
Changing the destination position,
see page 241
Editing a phone number, see page 242
Displaying details
!"If the entries in the position or name data
field are too long, the system abbreviates
the entries. You can display the complete
entry using this function.
Displaying name details
!"This function is only available if you edit an
entry of the category Address List.
To open the Options menu: Highlight
the name data field in the editing menu
and push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
The complete entry is displayed.
To close the details display: Press
the controller $.
Displaying position details
!"This function is not available if you edit an
entry of the category Address List.
To open the Options menu: Highlight
the position data field in the editing
menu and push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
The complete entry is displayed.
To close the details display: Press
the controller $.
Editing the name
!"The name of the entry in the categories
Home and Work cannot be edited.
You can enter a maximum of 50 characters
for a name.
To initiate editing: Select the name
data field in the editing menu.
The predictive speller appears and
you can now edit the name.
To enter a character: Proceed as
described in the chapter "Phone",
section "Entering a name" on page 176.
To delete individual characters:
Select the menu item .
To delete all characters: Select the
menu item Delete All.
To complete editing: Select the menu
item OK.
If a Address Book entry with this name
already exists, you will see an
appropriate message.
To close the message: Press the
controller $.
You can edit the name again.
241
Navigation
Editing Address Book entries
Switching the name display on/off
!"The system displays Address Book entries
in the map using appropriate icons. In
addition to the icons, the system can also
display the destination names. You can
activated/deactivate this display.
To open the Options menu: Highlight
the name data field in the editing menu
and push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Show Name on Map.
The name display will be activated or
deactivated, depending on the previous
status. The status display will change
accordingly.
Display # = function deactivated
Display $ = function activated
Assigning a different icon
!"The system displays Address Book entries
in the map using appropriate icons.
You can use this function to assign an
Address Book entry an icon other than the
standard icon.
You cannot assign a different icon for the
entry in the categories Home, Work,
Favorite Point 1, Favorite Point 2,
Favorite Point 3 and Favorite Point 4.
To open the Icon menu: Select the
icon data field in the editing menu.
The Icon menu appears.
To select an icon: In the Icon menu,
highlight the desired icon and press the
controller $.
To confirm the selection and assign
the icon: Select the menu item OK.
To reassign the standard icon: In the
Icon menu, select the menu item
Delete.
Changing the destination position
Select the position data field in the
editing menu.
The map display appears.
To set the map scale: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired scale is
reached.
To move the map: Push and hold the
controller $ in any direction ('(,
%& or )*).
The map moves accordingly.
To confirm the change: Press the
controller $.
The editing menu appears again.
To cancel the change: Press the .
button.
To display address data in full:
Highlight the position data field in the
editing menu and push & the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
242
Navigation
Editing Address Book entries
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
!"The menu item Details can only be selected
if the address data exceeds a certain length.
The address data is displayed in full.
Editing a phone number
!"You can enter a maximum of 20 characters
for a phone number.
Select the phone number data field in
the editing menu.
The predictive speller appears and you
can now edit the phone number.
To enter a character: Proceed as
described in the section "Phone",
section "Entering a name" on page 176.
To delete individual characters:
Select the menu item .
To delete all characters: Select the
menu item Delete All.
To complete editing: Select the menu
item OK.
Deleting a phone number/Initiating a call
to a phone number
Highlight the phone number data field in
the editing menu.
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
To delete the phone number: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Delete.
The phone number is deleted.
To initiate a call: In the Options menu,
select the menu item Dial Number.
!"The menu item Dial Number can only be
selected if the following conditions are met:
The Address Book entry contains a
phone number.
There is a mobile phone connected with
the system.
243
Navigation
Settings
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Opening the Settings menu
Press and hold the . button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
To close the menus: Press the .
button repeatedly until all of the menus
are closed.
You can access the following functions in
the Settings menu:
Setting the volume of the audible
driving recommendations, see the
section "Setting the volume" on
page 191
Map display settings, see page 243
Estimated time of arrival settings, see
page 245
Avoid Area settings, see page 246
Displaying navigation information,
see page 249
Reset function, see page 250
Map display settings
Open the Settings menu, see the
section "Opening the Settings menu"
on page 243.
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Map Display.
A list appears in which you can activate,
deactivate and switch various functions.
The functions are listed below.
To close the list: Briefly press
the . button.
Function Display Mode
!"You can use this function to switch the map
display to day, night or automatic mode.
Highlight the list item Display Mode.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears. The
icon " to the left of a menu item
indicates that this setting is currently
active.
Select the desired setting.
!"If you select the setting Automatic, the map
display mode will be automatically switched
as a function of the vehicle illumination.
Function Display Miles/Display Km
!"You can use this function to switch the
display of distance values from miles to
kilometers or vice versa.
To switch from miles to kilometers:
Select the list item Display Miles.
The labelling of the list item changes to
Display Km.
To switch from kilometers to miles:
Select the list item Display Km.
The labelling of the list item changes to
Display Miles.
244
Navigation
Settings
All other functions
To activate/deactivate the function:
Select the corresponding list entry.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be activated or deactivated.
The status display to the left of the
menu item changes accordingly.
Display # = function deactivated
Display $ = function activated
The functions are listed below.
Function Show Avoid Area
If you activate this function, the system
can show you the so-called "Avoid Areas",
see the section "Avoid Area settings" on
page 246.
Function Show Traffic Info on Map
If you activate this function, the traffic
information will be displayed in the map on
receipt, see the section "Displaying the
traffic information in the map" on page 231.
Function Position Tracking
The system automatically tracks the
vehicle position. If you activate this
function, the system can show you the
tracked vehicle position in the map over
a distance of max. 124 mi (200 km) in the
form of a dotted line.
Resetting position tracking
Resetting position tracking deletes all
previously stored position information and
restarts position tracking.
Highlight the list item Position
Tracking.
Push & the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
Press the controller $.
Position tracking is reset.
Switching the map orientation
!"You can use this function to set whether the
map is oriented to the north or the direction
of travel.
To call up the map display: Briefly
press the / button.
The map display appears.
To open the Map Options menu:
Press the controller $.
The Map Options menu appears.
In the Map Options menu, select the
menu item North Up View or Heading
Up.
The map orientation is switched. The
icon to the left of the menu item
changes accordingly.
Icon =fixed map orientation,
north is always at the top.
Icon = dynamic map orientation,
driving direction is always at the top.
245
Navigation
Settings
Switching the map mode
The following functions are available:
Show Freeway Mode
Turn by Turn
Function Show Freeway Mode
If you activate this function, the system
can show you freeway information on the
right-hand side of the display, see the
section "Freeway information" on
page 228.
Function Turn by Turn
If you activate this function, the system
can show you a turn list on the right-hand
side of the display, see the section "Turn
List" on page 228.
Activating/deactivating a function
To call up the map display: Briefly
press the / button.
The map display appears.
To open the Map Options menu:
Press the controller $.
The Map Options menu appears.
In the Map Options menu, select the
menu item Map Mode.
To activate/deactivate a function:
Select the menu item Show Freeway
Mode or Turn by Turn.
Depending on the previous status, the
corresponding function will be activated
or deactivated. The status display to the
left of the menu item changes
accordingly.
Display # = function deactivated
Display $ = function activated
Estimated time of arrival settings
!"You can use this function to set the average
vehicle speed used by the system as a basis
for calculating the estimated time of
arrival. You can make separate settings
for three different road types.
Open the Settings menu, see the
section "Opening the Settings menu"
on page 243.
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Time To Destination.
The corresponding menu appears.
Correct screenshot needed, this one is
only an example.
!Road type
"Indicator
#Currently set speed
To select a road type: Push '( the
controller $ repeatedly until the
desired road type is highlighted.
To set the speed: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired setting is
reached.
The system saves this setting
automatically.
To close the menu: Push % the
controller $.
246
Navigation
Settings
Avoid Area settings
!"You can set up to ten areas which should be
avoided for route guidance.
Opening the Avoid Area main menu
Open the Settings menu, see the
section "Opening the Settings menu" on
page 243.
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Avoid Area.
The Avoid Area main menu appears.
Correct screenshot needed, menu item
"Add Avoid Area" must be highlighted,
menu must contain four entered avoid
areas at least.
!List of Avoid Areas already stored
"Avoid Area main menu
After opening the Avoid Area main menu,
the following options are available:
Adding an Avoid Area, see page 246
Deleting Avoid Areas, see page 248
Editing Avoid Areas, see page 248
Adding an Avoid Area
In the Avoid Area main menu, select the
menu item Add Avoid Area.
A selection list appears. Now you can
enter the desired area.
Entry of a area is divided into the following
steps:
1. Entering a destination as the starting
point of the Avoid Area.
2. Defining the Avoid Area.
Entering a destination as the starting
point for the Avoid Area
Correct screenshot needed, menu item
"Address" must be highlighted.
Select one of the menu items to enter a
destination. Please see from the
section "Entering a destination" on
page 234 onwards.
Defining the Avoid Area
After entering the destination, you will see
the map display with crosshairs. The
crosshairs center is set to the destination.
Correct screenshot needed.
247
Navigation
Settings
!Crosshairs
Now you can define the top left point of the
Avoid Area.
To set the map scale: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired scale is
reached.
To move the crosshairs: Push and
hold the controller $ in any direction
('(%&)*).
The crosshairs moves accordingly.
To define the top left point: Press the
the controller $.
Now you can define the bottom right point
of the Avoid Area.
Correct screenshot needed.
To set the map scale and to move the
crosshairs: Proceed as previously
described when defining the top left
point.
To define the bottom right point:
Press the the controller $.
You will see the defined area in the
map.
Correct screenshot needed.
!Defined area
To confirm the defined area: Press
the controller $.
You will see the Avoid Area main menu
again. The defined area is stored and
appears in the menu. The system
automatically uses the address as the
Avoid Area name. You can edit the
name, see section "Editing the name"
on page 249.
248
Navigation
Settings
Deleting Avoid Areas
Deleting a single area
In the Avoid Area main menu, highlight
the desired area.
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
To show the area in the map: In the
Options menu, select the men item
Show on Map.
You will see the area in the map.
To set the map scale: Turn +, the
controller $ until the desired scale is
reached.
To close the map display: Press
the . button.
or
Do nothing for a certain time.
To delete the area: In the Options
menu, select the menu item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the area.
Select Yes or No.
The area will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
Deleting all areas
In the Avoid Area main menu, select
any area you like.
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all areas.
Select Yes or No.
All areas will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
Editing Avoid Areas
Opening the editing menu
In the Avoid Area main menu, select the
desired area.
The editing menu appears
Correct screenshot needed.
!Name data field of the Avoid Area
"Position data field of the Avoid Area
#Display of the current status
Setting the status
!"If you set the status to on, the navigation
system will try to avoid the area for route
guidance. If you set the status to off, the
navigation system will not try to avoid the
area for route guidance.
Open the editing menu, see the section
"Opening the editing menu" on
page 248.
249
Navigation
Settings
In the editing menu, highlight the menu
item Use Avoid Area.
To open the Options menu: Push &
the controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item On or Off.
Depending on the menu item selected,
the status will be set accordingly.
Editing the name
Open the editing menu, see the section
"Opening the editing menu" on
page 248.
In the editing menu, highlight the menu
item Avoid Area.
Press the controller $.
The predictive speller appears and
you can now edit the name.
To delete individual characters:
Select the menu item .
To enter a character: Proceed as
described in the chapter "Phone",
section "Entering a name" on page 176.
To delete all characters: Select the
menu item Delete All.
To complete editing: Select the menu
item OK.
Displaying name details
!"If the entry in the name data field is too long,
the system abbreviates the entry. You can
display the complete entry using this
function.
Open the editing menu, see the section
"Opening the editing menu" on
page 248.
In the editing menu, highlight the menu
item Avoid Area and push & the
controller $.
The Options menu appears.
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
The complete entry is displayed.
To close the details display: Press
the controller $.
Displaying navigation information
Open the Settings menu, see the
section "Opening the Settings menu" on
page 243.
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item NAVI Information.
The Information menu appears.
Correct screenshot needed, this one is
only an example.
!Current vehicle speed
"Geo-coordinates of the current vehicle
position
#Current vehicle position in metres
above sea level
$GPS reception quality
%Version number of the digital map
250
Navigation
Settings
!"Adequate GPS reception must be available
for the displays " and #. The altitude
display # may differ from reality because
the system calculates it using the GPS
signals.
To close the Information menu:
Press the . button.
Reset function
This function resets the navigation settings
to their factory settings. The Address Book
data except of the previous destinations will
not be reset.
Open the Settings menu, see the
section "Opening the Settings menu"
on page 243.
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Factory Reset.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to reset the settings.
Select Yes or No.
The settings will or will not be reset,
depending on the answer you select.
251
Voice control
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Tuner mode (FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio) . . . . 258
Disc mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Phone mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Navigation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Command overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
252
Voice control
General information
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Safety instruction
Symbols
Some of the voice commands initiate a
dialog between the user and the voice
control system. A number of dialogs are
given in the operating guide by way of
example.
The following symbols are used in the
sample dialogs:
Symbol !
In a sample dialog between the voice
control system and the user, this symbol
indicates a voice command by the user.
Symbol #
In a sample dialog between the voice
control system and the user, this symbol
indicates an announcement by the system.
Symbol $
In a sample dialog between the voice
control system and the user, this symbol
indicates information shown on the display.
Symbol Ping %
In a sample dialog between the voice
control system and the user, this symbol
indicates the tone signalling that the voice
control system is ready for commands to be
entered.
Symbol ...*
Using your voice control system you can
call up station names, phonebook entries
or points of interest. These names are
represented by ...* in the sample dialogs.
Symbol ... (1-X)
If a set of brackets containing a number
range appears after the three points, these
three points indicate a number within this
range, for example "Disc ...(1-6)".
WARNING
Stressful situations can affect the sound of
your voice and could result in a telephone
call you want not being made quickly
enough. The distraction could result in you
losing control of the vehicle.
Do not operate the telephone function
using voice control in an emergency.
253
Voice control
General information
Operating language
The voice control system can be operated
in English language. It doesn’t matter,
which system language is set in the System
settings.
General notes on operation
Voice control is activated by pressing
the 9 button on the steering wheel. This
allows you to operate the Driver Information
System without taking your hands from the
steering wheel.
The voice control system recognizes
commands or numerical sequences
regardless of who is speaking. It provides
audible feedback and guides you through
the functions.
If you say an incorrect or unavailable
command, the voice control system
responds with "Pardon?" and you can
repeat the command. After the 3rd failed
attempt, the system aborts the operation
and the dialog is terminated with "Cancel".
You can cancel a dialog at any time by
pressing and holding the 9 button on the
steering wheel or by saying the command
"Cancel".
!"The button 9 on the steering wheel has no
function when there is a telephone call in
progress.
You can also cancel dialogs by pressing
any button on your Driver Information
System. This does not apply to the volume
control, which can still be used to adjust the
volume when a dialog is active.
Please refer also to the sections "Activating
voice control" on page 254, "Deactivating
voice control" on page 254 and "Setting the
volume" on page 254.
Voice input
To ensure optimum voice recognition by
your voice control system, please observe
the following points:
Speak continuously and at normal
volume. Avoid long pauses and
excessive emphasis.
Reduce interference by closing
windows, doors and the sunroof.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle
when using the voice control system
(e.g. conversations between other
passengers going on at the same time).
The faster the vehicle is traveling, the
greater the ambient noise. You should
therefore speak more loudly at higher
speeds.
Do not enter voice commands while an
announcement is being made.
The hands-free microphone is directed
towards the driver's seat. The voice
control system should therefore be
operated by the driver.
254
Voice control
General information
General operation
Activating voice control
Briefly press the 9 button on the
steering wheel.
After the Ping %
%%
% sounds, the voice control
system is ready to receive commands. If
you do not enter a command, the voice
control system will prompt you for one by
saying "Pardon?".
!"It is not possible to activate the voice control
system while making or receiving a
telephone call.
Deactivating voice control
!"You can quit the voice control system at any
time, even during a dialog.
Press and hold the 9 button on the
steering wheel for several seconds.
or
Say the command "Cancel".
The voice control system confirms with
"Cancel" and switches off.
On-screen symbol
As soon as the voice control system is
activated and the ping has sounded, the
symbol appears in the bottom status
line or in the navigation map.
!Voice control symbol in the bottom
status line
!Voice control symbol in the
navigation map
Setting the volume
!"The volume of the voice control system is
independent of the volume set for the
telephone/audio system.
You can adjust the volume of the
announcements made by the voice control
system, for example in response to
variations in ambient noise during the
journey.
Activate the voice control system and
say a command such as "Help".
During the subsequent announcement,
turn the volume control on your unit to
increase or lower the volume.
255
Voice control
General information
Commands
The commands that you can use to operate
your voice control system are divided into
two categories:
Local commands
Local commands can only be used
within the respective main function, for
example "Next track" when in Disc
mode.
You can call up the available local
commands whenever you use the
teleprompter. Please refer also to the
section "Help function (teleprompter)"
on page 256.
Group commands
Group commands can be used within
any operating mode. They cover the
main functions, the individual operating
areas of your Driver Information System
and the help function.
Calling up the help function:
Help
Group commands for the main
functions:
Main commands
Group commands for tuner mode:
Radio commands
Station commands
Frequency commands
Group commands for disc mode:
Disc commands
Select disc commands
Track commands
Folder commands
Group commands for phone mode:
Phone commands
Number commands
Phonebook commands
Group commands for navigation mode:
Navigation commands
Adressbook commands
Destination search commands
Route guidance commands
Map commands
Skipping sections of a dialog
!"By briefly pressing the 9 button during an
active dialog you can skip a voice
announcement or return to the start of your
voice input and repeat it.
Skipping voice announcements
Briefly press the 9 button during a
voice announcement by the unit.
The voice announcement is skipped
and the voice control system is ready
for the next voice input.
256
Voice control
General information
Repeating input
Briefly press the 9 button during voice
input.
The voice control system returns to the
point in the dialog where you started
your input and you can repeat it.
Configuring voice control
Switching the teleprompter on/off
!"The visual help is called teleprompter, see
example illustration below.
This function is described in the chapter
"Info", section "Show voice command" on
page 290.
Switching confirmation prompts on/off
!"Spoken commands are repeated by the
voice control system when this function is
switched on.
This function is described in the chapter
"Info", section "Confirm voice command" on
page 290.
Help function (teleprompter)
!"The help function comprises an acoustic
help component and a visual help
component, also called teleprompter.
The voice control system features an
integrated help function that is always
available.
This help function is automatically activated
as soon as
the system does not understand a voice
input
or
voice input is not made in the dialog.
The help function can also be activated at
any time using the command "Help".
Automatically activated help function
The help function is automatically activated
as soon as the voice control system
identifies a problem with the voice input.
Help is then provided in two steps:
Step 1:
The commands from the top operating
level are displayed in the teleprompter.
You now have the option of reading the
desired command and continuing the
voice input. The second step of the help
function follows if voice input is not
continued or continued incorrectly.
Step 2:
The commands are displayed in the
teleprompter and said by the voice
control system.
257
Voice control
General information
Calling up the help function and using it
for operation
If you call up the help function using the
command "Help", the commands are both
displayed in the teleprompter and said by
the voice control system.
If you activate the help function and repeat
one of the commands, you can then
activate the help function again. This is how
you access the available commands from
the next operating level.
!"You can also show the commands from an
operating area directly using the group
commands, for example "Phone
commands".
Operating picklists
The voice control system can display
picklists to you on the screen, for example
the channel list in the XM® tuner mode.
Scrolling through a picklist
You can scroll through any picklist using
the commands "Next page", "Previous
page", "Back", "First Page" or "Last Page".
!"You can also scroll through a list using the
controller, see chapter "Functional
introduction", section "Lists" on page 29.
Selecting an entry in a picklist
Within picklists, you have the following two
options for selecting an entry:
Say the contents as they are displayed
in the row.
Say the command "Entry...(1-8)".
!"You can also select an entry in a list using
the controller, see chapter "Functional
introduction", section "Selecting a menu
item" on page 28.
258
Voice control
Tuner mode (FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio)
Calling up tuner mode
FM or AM tuner: Press the 9 button
on the steering wheel and say the
command "Radio on" after the signal
tone.
FM or AM tuner mode is called up and
the appropriate main menu appears on
the display. The last selected station is
played.
XM® tuner: Press the 9 button on the
steering wheel and say the command
"XM" after the signal tone.
XM® tuner mode is called up and the
XM® Satellite Radio menu appears on
the display. The last selected channel is
played.
Tuner mode help
You can use the command "Radio
commands" to listen to all the commands
available for FM, AM or XM® tuner mode.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Radio
commands" after the signal tone.
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
Setting the waveband
You can use the commands
"FM"
"AM"
to set the waveband.
See also "Setting the waveband" on
page 259 in the section "Operating
examples".
Setting the frequency (FM or AM
tuner mode only)
You can use the commands
"FM ...(87.7-107.9)"
"AM ...(530-1710)"
to enter a radio frequency directly.
!"The frequency can be entered anywhere
within the range of 87.7 -107.9 MHz (FM)
and 530 - 1710 KHz (AM).
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command for the
desired frequency after the signal tone,
for example "FM 97.5".
The unit tunes to the desired frequency.
See also "Tuning to a radio station by
specifying the frequency (FM or AM tuner
mode only)" on page 260 in the section
"Operating examples".
259
Voice control
Tuner mode (FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio)
Next/previous station (FM and AM
tuner mode only)
You can use the commands "Next station"
and "Previous station" to tune the unit to the
next or previous station stored in the
presets.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the desired station.
Next/previous channel (XM® tuner
mode only)
You can use the commands "Next channel"
and "Previous channel" to tune the unit to
the next or previous channel stored in the
channel presets.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the desired channel.
Station search (FM and AM tuner
mode only)
You can use the commands "Seek up" and
"Seek down" to start the station search.
The station search proceeds upwards or
downwards and stops at the next
receivable station.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the next receivable
station.
Selecting channels (XM® tuner
mode only)
You can use the command "Channel ...*" to
select XM® Satellite Radio channels
directly by the channel name.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command
"Channel ...*" after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the desired channel.
You can use the command "Channel...(1-
255)" to select XM® Satellite Radio
channels directly by the channel number.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Channel
10" after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the desired channel.
You can use the command "Channel by
name" to select a channel from a picklist,
see also "Selecting a channel (XM® tuner
mode only)" on page 260 in the section
"Operating examples".
Operating examples
Setting the waveband
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"FM."
#"FM."
The corresponding waveband is set.
260
Voice control
Tuner mode (FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio)
Tuning to a radio station by specifying
the frequency (FM or AM tuner mode
only)
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"FM ...(87.7-107.9)."
#"FM ...(87.7-107.9)."
The unit tunes to the specified radio station.
Selecting a channel (XM® tuner mode
only)
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Channel by name."
#"Channel by name."
$The first page of the channel list is
displayed.
Screenshot is still wrong
#"Please say the channel name"
Ping %
!"...* "
#"...* "
The unit tunes to the selected channel.
261
Voice control
Disc mode
Calling up disc mode
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Disc on"
after the signal tone.
Disc mode is called up and the
appropriate main menu appears on
the display.
If there is a disc inserted or there is a
disc in the magazine of the changer,
playback of the last track played will
start.
Disc mode help
You can use the command "Disc
commands" to listen to all the commands
available for disc mode.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Disc
commands" after the signal tone.
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
Next/previous disc
You can use the command "Next disc" or
"Previous disc" to skip to the next or
previous disc and automatically start
playback.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The system starts playback of the
corresponding disc.
Selecting a disc directly
You can use the commands "Disc by
number" or "Disc ...(1-6)" to skip to the
selected disc and automatically start
playback.
See also "Selecting a disc" on page 262 in
the section "Operating examples".
Next/previous folder
You can use the command "Next folder" or
"Previous folder" to skip to the start of the
next or previous folder on the current disc
and automatically start playback.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The system starts playback of the
corresponding folder.
262
Voice control
Disc mode
Skipping tracks forwards/
backwards
You can use the command "Next track" or
"Previous track" to skip to the start of the
next or previous track on the current disc
and automatically start playback.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The system starts playback of the
corresponding track.
Selecting a track directly
You can use either of the commands
"Track by number" or "Track ...(1-99)" to
skip directly to a specific track on the
selected disc. Playback of the track starts
automatically.
See also "Selecting a track" on page 262 in
the section "Operating examples".
Operating examples
Selecting a disc
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Disc 3."
#"Disc 3."
The specified disc is played.
Selecting a track
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Track 10."
#"Track 10."
The specified track is played.
263
Voice control
Phone mode
!"Phone commands can be used only while a
Bluetooth® mobile phone is connected to
the system, see chapter "Phone", section
"Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile
phone" on page 153.
Calling up phone mode
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Phone
on" after the signal tone.
Phone mode is called up and the
appropriate main menu appears on the
display.
Phone help
You can use the command "Phone
commands" to show all the commands that
are available for your phone.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Phone
commands".
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
Dialing a number
You can use the command "Dial number" to
dial a phone number.
Use the numbers "zero" to "nine" to enter
the number.
State the phone number in blocks of digits,
separated by short pauses. After each
sequence of numbers, the voice control
system repeats the recognized digits.
The recognized digits are also shown on
the display.
See also "Dialing a phone number" on
page 264 in the section "Operating
examples".
Redialing
You can use the command "Redial" to
redial the last number dialed.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Redial"
after the signal tone.
The system starts redials the
corresponding number.
Storing numbers in the phonebook
You can use the command "Store number"
to store phone numbers in your phone's
phonebook.
See also "Storing a number and assigning
it to an existing phonebook entry" on
page 265 and "Storing a number and
creating a new phonebook entry" on
page 266 in the section "Operating
examples".
264
Voice control
Phone mode
Calling a phonebook entry
You can use the command "Call...*1" or
"Call by name" to place a call to a party
directly from your phonebook.
See also "Calling a number stored in the
phonebook" on page 264 in the section
"Operating examples".
Operating examples
Dialing a phone number
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Dial number."
#"Dial number."
Ping %
$A number speller is displayed for
entering the phone number.
#"Please say the number in groups of
digits."
Ping %
!"1234"
#"1234"
Ping %
$The teleprompter is opened with the
recognized phone number (1234) in
the first line and the number speller
with some options for numbers.
!"Dial."
The phone number is dialed.
Calling a number stored in the
phonebook
Option 1
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Call ...*2"
#"Call ...*3"
The corresponding number is dialed.
1. Name of the phonebook entry
2. Name of the phonebook entry
3. Name of the phonebook entry
265
Voice control
Phone mode
Option 2
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Call by name."
#"Call by name."
$The first page of the phonebook picklist
is displayed.
#"Please say the name."
Ping %
!"...* "
#"...* "
The selected entry is dialed.
Storing a number and assigning it to an
existing phonebook entry
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Store number."
#"Store number."
Ping %
$A number speller is displayed for
entering the phone number.
#"Please say the number in groups of
digits."
Ping %
!"1234"
#"1234"
Ping %
$The teleprompter is opened with the
recognized phone number (1234) in
the first line and the number speller
with some options for numbers.
!"Store number."
#"Do you want to add the number to an
existing entry or create a new one?"
Ping %
!"Add to entry." 
266
Voice control
Phone mode
$The teleprompter is opened with the
phonebook picklist.
#"Please say the name."
Ping %
!"...* "
#"...*.
A number was already entered. Do you
want to overwrite this number?"
!"Yes."
#"Yes.
The entry was created."
Storing a number and creating a new
phonebook entry
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Store number."
#"Store number."
Ping %
$A number speller is displayed for
entering the phone number.
#"Please say the number in groups of
digits."
Ping %
!"1234"
#"1234"
Ping %
$The teleprompter is opened with the
recognized phone number (1234) in
the first line and the number speller
with some options for numbers.
267
Voice control
Phone mode
!"Store number."
#"Do you want to add the number to an
existing entry or create a new one?"
Ping %
!"New entry."
#"The entry was created."
268
Voice control
Navigation mode
Calling up navigation mode
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command
"Navigation on" after the signal tone.
The navigation system is called up and
the appropriate main menu appears on
the display.
Navigation mode help
You can use the command "Navigation
commands" to listen to all the commands
that are available for your navigation
system.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command
"Navigation commands" after the signal
tone.
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
Entering a destination
You have a number of options for entering
destinations using the voice control
system.
Entering state/province
You can use the command "Enter state" or
"Enter province" to initiate a dialog for
entering the state or the province for a
destination.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Enter
state" or "Enter province" after the
signal tone.
#"Enter state" or "Enter province".
Please continue at "Entering the state
or the province" on page 271 in the
section "Operating examples".
Entering a city
You can use the command "Enter city" to
initiate a dialog for entering the city for a
destination.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Enter
city" after the signal tone.
If no state or province has been entered
yet:
#"No state or province entered yet".
Please continue at "Entering the state
or the province" on page 271 in the
section "Operating examples".
269
Voice control
Navigation mode
If a state or province has been entered
already:
Please continue at "Entering the city"
on page 272 in the section "Operating
examples".
Entering an address
You can use the command "Enter address"
to initiate a dialog for entering the address
data for a destination.
See also "Entering a destination" on
page 271 in the section "Operating
examples".
Entering a Point of Interest (POI) via the
phone number
You can use the command "Phone number
search" to initiate a dialog for entering a
POI using phone numbers internally stored
in the system.
See also "Entering Point of Interest (POI)
via the phone number" on page 273 in the
section "Operating examples".
Saving current position
You can use the command "Save current
position" to save the current position as a
mark point. See also "Saving the current
position" on page 276 in the section
"Operating examples".
Entering a destination stored in the
Adress Book
You likewise have a number of options for
entering destinations using a destination
stored in the Address Book.
The following commands are available for
this:
"Navigate to Address Book" or
"Navigate to ...*1"
See also "Entering a destination stored
in the address book" on page 274 in the
section "Operating examples".
"Navigate home" or "Navigate to office"
See also "Entering a destination stored
in the address book" on page 274 in the
section "Operating examples".
"Navigate to favorite point ...(1-4)."
See also "Entering a destination stored
in the address book" on page 274 in the
section "Operating examples".
"Navigate to previous destination"
See also "Entering a destination stored
in the address book" on page 274 in the
section "Operating examples".
Starting route guidance
You can use the command "Start route
guidance" to start a route guidance
session.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Start
route guidance" after the signal tone.
The route guidance will be started.
1. Name of the address book entry
270
Voice control
Navigation mode
Stopping route guidance
You can use the commando "Stop route
guidance" to stop an active route guidance
session.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Stop
route guidance" after the signal tone.
The route guidance will be stopped.
Muting and reactivating navigation
announcements
You can mute and reactivate the navigation
announcements using the voice control
system. The following commands are
available for this:
"Guidance voice off"
"Guidance voice on"
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The system mutes or reactivates the
navigation announcements.
Redefining a navigation route
The following commands are available for
redefining the route for the route guidance
session:
"Reroute"
"Reroute shortest distance"
"Reroute minimize freeway"
"Reroute minimize toll road"
"Reroute shortest time"
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The route will be redefined.
Setting a detour
You can use the following commands to set
a detour for a section of your route:
"Detour"
"Detour 1 mile" or "Detour 1 kilometer"
"Detour 2 miles" or "Detour 2 kilometer"
"Detour 5 miles" or "Detour 5 kilometer"
"Detour 10 miles" or "Detour 10
kilometer"
!"The usage of "miles" or "kilometer" depends
on the map display setting, see section
"Map display settings" on page page 243.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The corresponding detour will be set.
Map display
Calling up the map display
The map display is called up using the
command "Map on".
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Map on"
after the signal tone.
You will see the map.
After calling up the map, you have various
options for adapting it to the current
conditions using the voice control system.
271
Voice control
Navigation mode
Zooming in/zooming out
You can use the commands "Map zoom in"
and "Map zoom out" to set the desired map
scale.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The map will be zoomed.
Zooming in completely (city mode)
You can use the command "Max zoom" to
show a very detailed display of the current
position.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Max
zoom" after the signal tone.
The map will be zoomed accordingly.
Zooming to the entire route
You can use the command "Display route"
to show the map display with the entire
calculated route and the Options menu.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the command "Display
route" after the signal tone.
You will see the map display with the
entire calculated route and the Options
menu.
Setting the map orientation
You can use the commands "Map north up"
or "Map heading up" to orient the map
either to the north or the direction of travel.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The map orientation changes
accordingly.
Switching traffic information on/off
You can use the commands "Traffic
Information On" or "Traffic Information Off"
to switch displaying of traffic information on
or off.
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
Operating examples
Entering a destination
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Enter address."
#"Enter address."
Entering the state or the province
#"Please say the state or province
name."
Ping %
!"Michigan"
#"Michigan"
$The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting the state or province. 
272
Voice control
Navigation mode
!"Michigan"
#"Michigan"
Entering the city
#"Please say the city name."
Ping %
!"Westland"
#"Westland"
$The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting the city.
!"Westland"
#"Westland"
Entering the street
#"Please say the street name."
Ping %
!"Reuther RD"
#"Reuther RD"
$The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting the road.
!"Reuther RD"
#"Reuther RD"
If no house numbers are available:
#"Do you want to start the route
guidance to ...*?"
Ping %
!"Yes. "
The navigation system uses the address as
the destination and starts route guidance.
If house numbers are available:
You can enter a house number, see below.
273
Voice control
Navigation mode
Entering the house number
#"Please say individual numbers from 0
to 9"
$A number speller is displayed for
entering the house number.
#"Please say the number in groups of
digits."
Ping %
!"78"
#"78"
Ping %
$A number speller is displayed with the
recognized house number (78) in the
first line.
!"Start route guidance"
#"Do you want to start the route
guidance to ...*?"
Ping %
!"Yes. "
The navigation system uses the address as
the destination and starts route guidance.
Entering Point of Interest (POI) via the
phone number
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Phone number search."
#"Phone number search."
$A number speller is displayed for
entering the phone number.
#"Please say the number in groups of
digits."
Ping %
!"123."
#"123."
Ping %
274
Voice control
Navigation mode
$A number speller is displayed with the
first part of the recognized phone
number (123) in the first line and the
number speller with some options for
numbers.
!"456."
#"456."
Ping %
$A number speller is displayed with the
total recognized phone number
(123456) in the first line and the
number speller with some options for
numbers.
!"Start route guidance."
$The entered destination is shown on
the map.
#"Do you want to start the route
guidance to the entered destination?"
Ping %
!"Yes. "
The navigation system uses the phone
number and the corresponding address of
the POI as the destination and starts route
guidance.
Entering a destination stored in the
address book
Option 1
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Navigate to ...*1."
#"Navigate to ...*."
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the address of the selected
address book entry.
Option 2
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Navigate home." or "Navigate to
office."
#"Navigate home." or "Navigate to
office."
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the corresponding address.
1. Name of the address book entry
275
Voice control
Navigation mode
Option 3
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Navigate to favorite point ...(1-4)."
#"Navigate to favorite point ...(1-4)."
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the corresponding address.
Option 4
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Navigate to Address Book."
#"Navigate to Address Book."
$The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting an Address Book entry.
#"Please say the name."
Ping %
!"...* "
#"...* "
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the selected address book
entry.
Entering a destination via the "Previous
destinations"
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Navigate to previous destination."
#"Navigate to previous destination."
$The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting the right recent destination
name.
#"Please say the name."
Ping %
!"...* "
#"...* " 
276
Voice control
Navigation mode
#"Do you want to start the route
guidance to the entered destination?"
Ping %
!"Yes. "
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the recent destination.
Saving the current position
Press the 9 button on the steering
wheel.
#Ping %
!"Save current position."
#"Save current position."
The Driver Information System stores the
current position as a mark point.
277
Voice control
Command overview
Group commands
For the help function
"Help"
For the main functions
"Main commands"
For tuner mode
"Radio commands"
"Station commands"
"Frequency commands"
For disc mode
"Disc commands"
"Select disc commands"
"Folder commands"
"Track commands"
For phone mode
"Phone commands"
"Number commands"
"Phonebook commands"
For navigation mode
"Navigation commands"
"Adressbook commands"
"Destination search commands"
"Route guidance commands"
"Map commands"
Tuner commands
Mode selection commands
"Radio on"
"XM"
Help command
"Radio commands"
Wave band selection commands
"FM"
"AM"
Station selection commands (FM and
AM tuner mode only)
"Next station"
"Previous station"
"Seek up"
"Seek down"
Frequency selection commands (FM/AM
tuner mode only)
"FM ...(87.7-107.9)"
"AM ...(530-1710)"
Channel commands (XM® tuner mode
only)
"Next channel"
"Previous channel"
"Channel ...*
"Channel...(1-255)"
"Channel by name"
Disc commands
Mode selection command
"Disc on"
Help command
"Disc commands"
Disc selection commands
"Next disc"
"Previous disc"
"Disc by number"
"Disc ...(1-6)"
278
Voice control
Command overview
Folder selection commands
"Next folder"
"Previous folder"
Track selection commands
"Next track"
"Previous track"
"Track by number"
"Track ...(1-99)"
Phone commands
Mode selection command
"Phone on"
Help commands
"Phone commands"
"Number commands"
"Phonebook commands"
Dialing commands
"Dial number"
"Redial"
"Call by name"
"Call ...*1"
Storing command
"Store number"
Navigation commands
Mode selection command
"Navigation on"
Help command
"Navigation commands"
Destination entering commands
"Enter state"
"Enter province"
"Enter city"
"Enter address"
"Phone number search"
Address Book commands
"Navigate home"
"Navigate to office"
"Navigate to favorite point ...(1-4)"
"Navigate to previous destination"
"Navigate to Address Book"
"Navigate to ...*2"
Storing commands
"Save current position"
Route guidance commands
Start or stop route guidance
"Start route guidance"
"Stop route guidance"
Route redefining
"Reroute"
"Reroute shortest distance"
"Reroute minimize freeway"
"Reroute minimize toll road"
"Reroute shortest time"
Detour setting
"Detour"
"Detour 1 mile" or "Detour 1 kilometer"
"Detour 2 miles" or "Detour 2 kilometer"
"Detour 5 miles" or "Detour 5 kilometer"
"Detour 10 miles" or "Detour 10 kilometer"
!"The usage of "miles" or "kilometer" depends
on the map display setting, see section
"Map display settings" on page page 243.
1. Name of the phonebook entry 2. Name of the address book entry
279
Voice control
Command overview
Navigation announcements
"Guidance voice off"
"Guidance voice on"
Map commands
"Map on"
"Map zoom in"
"Map zoom out"
"Max zoom"
"Display route"
"Map north up"
"Map heading up"
Traffic information commands
"Traffic Information On"
"Traffic Information Off"
280
Voice control
281
Info
Opening the Info main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Info functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
All Screenshots are ok
282
Info
Opening the Info main menu
!"For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
"Functional introduction" from page 17.
Press the 1 button.
Either the Phone main menu or the Info
main menu appears.
If the Phone main menu appears:
Press the 1 button once more.
The Info main menu appears.
Info main menu
Available submenus and functions
Climate, see page 283
Trip Info, see page 283
Car Settings, see page 283
System Settings, see page 287
283
Info
Info functions
Climate
!"You can't operate anything in this menu
using the Driver Information System. You
must use the corresponding vehicle
controls. For further information, please see
the Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
In the Info main menu, select the menu
item Climate.
You will see various information
such as the exterior temperature, the
temperature in the front seats and
the fan setting.
Trip Info
!"You can't operate anything in this menu
using the Driver Information System. You
must use the corresponding vehicle
controls. For further information, please see
the Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
In the Info main menu, select the menu
item Trip Info.
You will see various information
such as the distance covered and the
average speed.
Car Settings
!"This function may not be available. It
depends on the vehicle equipment.
Opening the Car Settings menu
!"Opening the Car Settings menu is not
possible as soon as the vehicle exceeds a
certain speed.
As soon as the vehicle falls below a certain
speed, it will be possible again.
Open the Info main menu, see section
"Opening the Info main menu" on
page 282.
!Info main menu 
284
Info
Info functions
In the Info main menu, select the menu
item Car Settings.
!Car Settings menu
The following menu items are available:
Auto Door Lock, see page 285
Auto Door Unlock, see page 285
Seat Easy Access, see page 286
Steering Easy Access, see page 286
Door Lock Sound, see page 286
Key Activate Alarm, see page 286
Car Settings menu while the vehicle is
driving
If the Car Settings menu is already opened
and the vehicle exceeds a certain speed,
the higlight cursor disappears and all menu
items are shown in grey color.
Illustration shows the Car Settings menu
while the vehicle is standing
!Car Settings menu
"Highlight cursor
Illustration shows the Car Settings menu
while the vehicle is driving
!Car Settings menu without highlight
cursor and with menu items shown in
grey color
Since all menu items are shown in grey
color, none of them can be selected.
!"You can always use the . button to go
back to the next higher menu level.
285
Info
Info functions
Auto Door Lock
!"This function automatically locks the doors
as soon as a specific condition is met.
Open the Car Settings menu, see
section "Opening the Car Settings
menu" on page 283.
!Car Settings menu
In the Car Settings menu, select the
menu item Auto Door Lock.
The corresponding menu containing the
respective setting options appears.
!Icon " for currently active setting
To change the setting: Select another
setting.
Off = Function is switched off.
Vehicle Speed = Doors will be
locked as soon as a specific vehicle
speed is exceeded.
Shift Lever = Doors will be locked
as a function of the shift lever
position.
Auto Door Unlock
!"This function automatically unlocks the
doors as soon as a specific condition is met.
Open the Car Settings menu, see
section "Opening the Car Settings
menu" on page 283.
!Car Settings menu
In the Car Settings menu, select the
menu item Auto Door Unlock.
The corresponding menu containing the
respective setting options appears. 
286
Info
Info functions
!Icon " for currently active setting
To change the setting: Select another
setting.
Off = Function is switched off.
Key Out = Doors will be unlocked
as soon as the ignition key is
removed from the key holder
(vehicles without ignition) or from
the ignition (vehicles with ignition).
Shift Lever = Doors will be unlocked
as a function of the shift lever
position.
Drivers Door = Doors will be
unlocked when the driver's door
is unlocked.
All other functions
All other functions can only be switched on
or off; therefore, only a summarized
description is provided. The individual
functions are explained below.
!Car Settings menu
To select a function: In the Car
Settings menu, select the desired
menu item.
The corresponding menu containing the
respective setting options appears.
The current setting is identified by the
icon ".
To switch the function on or off:
Select the menu item On or Off.
Seat Easy Access
The function Seat Easy Access
automatically moves the driver's seat back
a little as soon as the vehicle's ignition is
switched off. When the ignition is switched
back on, the seat moves back to the
position you defined.
Steering Easy Access
The function Steering Easy Access
automatically moves the steering wheel
away from you as the vehicle's ignition is
switched off. When the vehicle's ignition is
switched on, the steering wheel moves to
the position you defined.
Door Lock Sound
When the function Door Lock Sound is
switched on, you will hear a signal tone
when locking or unlocking the vehicle using
the key remote.
Key Activate Alarm
When the function Key Activate Alarm is
switched on, the vehicle alarm system will
not only be activated when locking the
doors using the key remote, but also when
locking them using the physical key.
287
Info
Info functions
System Settings
Opening the System Settings menu
Open the Info main menu, see section
"Opening the Info main menu" on
page 282.
!Info main menu
In the Info main menu, select the menu
item System Settings.
The System Settings menu appears.
!System Settings menu
The following menu items are available:
Display Off, see page 287
Language, see page 288
Display Dimming, see page 289
Display Brightness, see page 289
Show voice command, see page 290
Confirm voice command, see
page 290
Display Off
!"You can switch off the front display using
this function. Certain vehicle-specific
information will continue to be displayed
even when the display is switched off.
Certain events or the initiation of certain
functions will also result in corresponding
displays that automatically disappear after
a certain time.
Switching the display off
Open the System Settings menu, see
section "Opening the System Settings
menu" on page 287.
!System Settings menu 
288
Info
Info functions
In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Display Off.
or
Press the DISPLAY button on the
climate control area of the vehicle.
The display switches off.
Switching the display on
Press the controller $.
or
Press one of the following main function
buttons:
-
3
2
/
0
1
.
or
Press the : button on the steering
wheel.
or
Press the DISPLAY button on the
climate control area of the vehicle.
Language
!"This function lets you switch the language in
the display and the language for the
navigation announcements.
The language of the voice control system is
independently from this setting. It is always
set to the English language.
Open the System Settings menu, see
section "Opening the System Settings
menu" on page 287.
!System Settings menu
In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Language.
The corresponding menu appears.
!Icon " for currently active setting
To switch the setting: Select the other
menu item.
289
Info
Info functions
Display Dimming
!"You can switch control of the display
dimming using this function.
!System Settings menu
In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Display Dimming.
The corresponding menu appears.
!Icon " for currently active setting
To switch the setting: Select the other
menu item.
Auto Mode:
When the vehicle light is switched
off, the display is always at full
brightness. When the vehicle light is
switched on, the display brightness
is set to 67% of the brightness set
for day mode.
Day Mode:
When the vehicle light is switched
off, the display is always at the
brightness set for day mode.
When the vehicle light is switched
on, the display brightness is set to
90% of the brightness set for day
mode.
!"Please see the section "Display Brightness"
on page 289 to find out how to set the
brightness for day mode.
Display Brightness
!"You can use this function primarily to set the
display brightness for day mode. However it
also influences the display brightness in
auto mode. For further information, please
refer to the section "Display Dimming" on
page 289.
Open the System Settings menu, see
section "Opening the System Settings
menu" on page 287.
!System Settings menu
In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Display Brightness.
After selecting the menu item Display
Brightness, the Brightness Settings
menu appears.
Brightness Settings menu
!"After the Brightness Settings menu appears,
the brightness is always switched to the
value shown in the menu, regardless of how
the display dimming is set.
After the menu is closed, the brightness is
switched back to the value corresponding to
the set display dimming.
290
Info
Info functions
!Brightness Settings menu
To set the brightness value: Turn +,
the controller $ until the desired
setting is reached.
To exit the Brightness menu: Briefly
press the . button.
The system saves the settings
automatically.
Show voice command
!"The visual help of the voice control system
is called teleprompter. It shows available
voice commands, see example illustration
below.
Open the System Settings menu, see
section "Opening the System Settings
menu" on page 287.
!System Settings menu
In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Show Voice Command.
The corresponding menu appears.
!Icon " for currently active setting
To switch the setting: Select the other
menu item.
Confirm voice command
!"Many commands are repeated by the voice
control system when this function is
switched on.
!System Settings menu
291
Info
Info functions
In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Confirm Voice
Command.
The corresponding menu appears.
!Icon " for currently active setting
To switch the setting: Select the other
menu item.
292
Info
Info functions
293
Rear camera*
General information and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
!"The asterisk * identifies optional equipment.
294
Rear camera*
General information and operation
General information
The Driver Information System is
connected to the rear camera, for the
vehicles that are equipped.
Operation
Switching the rear camera view on
!"Switching the gear is described in detail in
the vehicle’s operation manual. Please pay
attention to the corresponding descriptions
and safety instructions in the vehicle’s
operation manual.
To switch the rear camera view on:
Switch the gear in the position of R.
The display of the Driver Information
System will switch to the rear camera
view.
!"The display in the vehicle may may be
diiferent from the picture below.
!Green line
"Yellow line
#Red line
The three lines !, " and # are showing
the following distances, each measured
from the rear bumper:
Red line = 50 cm (1.64 ft)
Yellow line = 100 cm (3.28 ft)
Green line = more than 100 cm (3.28 ft)
!"While the rear camera view is shown on the
display, pressing the button 8 on the
steering wheel will toggle through the
available audio/video sources in the
background.
Switching the rear camera view off
!"Switching the gear is described in detail in
the vehicle’s operation manual. Please pay
attention to the corresponding descriptions
and safety instructions in the vehicle’s
operation manual.
!"The rear camera view will automatically
switch off if the gear is switched to position
D and the vehicle exceeds a certain speed.
WARNING
The camera has a wide angle lens to obtain
wider visual field, so the actual distance may
be different from that comprehended
through the camera.
For safety, always check the front, rear, left,
and right of the vehicle.
295
Rear camera*
General information and operation
While the rear camera view is
displayed, switch the gear to any
position except of R and D.
The display will return to the normal
view.
!"Pressing one of the main function buttons
(e.g. button -) on the central control
panel may also switch the rear camera view
off.
296
Rear camera*
General information and operation
297
Appendix
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
298
Appendix
Technical data
Head unit
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Double DIN
W178 mm (7") x H104 mm (4.1") x
D204 mm (8")
Weight
2.5 kg (5.51 lbs)
Power consumption
Quiescent current (Head unit in sleep
mode): 2.3 mA
Average supply current: 2.3 A
Antenna type
XM® Satellite Radio and GPS:
Roof mounted antenna.
FM/AM: Integrated glass antenna
Radio
Reception range FM
87.9 - 107.9 MHz, 200 kHz step
Reception range AM
530 - 1710 kHz, 10 kHz step
Display
Size (active area, W x H)
174 mm (6.85") x 104.4 mm (4.11")
Diagonal size
202.9 mm (8")
Number of pixels
800 x 480
LCD type
Active matrix Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
using amorphous silicon thin film transistor
(TFT).
Viewing angle
Bottom side: 60°
Top side: 30°
Left and right side: 45°
Common
Operating voltage range
10 V - 15 V (typically 12 V)
Temperature range for usage and
storage
-40° C (-40° F) - +80° C (+176° F)
Operating humidity range
0 - 95%

Navigation menu